JP2019208869A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of enhancing player's motivation to play a game by increasing a degree of attention to the game and interest in the game.SOLUTION: A game machine 10 displays a plurality of items regarding an event that may occur in a variation game from a current jackpot game to a next jackpot game in a jackpot game, such as items regarding a probability variable jackpot and items regarding a normal jackpot, on a pattern display part 341. A player can select an item from among a plurality of items displayed on the pattern display part 341. When an event corresponding to the item selected by the player occurs, a virtual coin is granted to the player, and information for identifying or estimating a game setting value is displayed on segments A to G of a 7-segment display part 39. The player can also select the segments A to G to be controlled in a jackpot game on the basis of the virtual coin.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 45

Description

  The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines.

  In game machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines, when a jackpot lottery is performed, a notification game is executed to notify the lottery result, and when a jackpot lottery is won, game values such as game balls and coins are given to the player Some jackpots will be executed. Some of these gaming machines execute a mini game or the like during the execution of a notification game or a jackpot game.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2017-200168

  By the way, as a gaming machine, it is important to improve the player's willingness to play by increasing the degree of interest and interest in the game.

  An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can increase the degree of interest and interest in games and improve the player's willingness to play.

The gaming machine according to the present invention is
Item presenting means (341) for presenting the player with the plurality of items for causing the player to select at least one item from among a plurality of items relating to events that may occur during the progress of the game;
When an event corresponding to a selection item selected by the player from the plurality of items presented by the item presenting means (341) occurs during the progress of the game, it is selected by the player from the plurality of benefits. Privilege granting means (51) for granting the selected privilege to the player;
Privilege presenting means (341) for presenting the plurality of privileges;
A selected privilege storage means (51) for storing a selected privilege selected by the player among the plurality of privileges;
With
The privilege granting means (51) gives the player the selected privilege stored in the selected privilege storage means when an event corresponding to the selection item occurs during the game. .

The perspective view which shows an example of a structure of the game machine which concerns on the 1st Embodiment of this invention. The expanded view which shows an example of a structure of the gaming machine shown in FIG. The expanded view which shows an example of a structure of the gaming machine shown in FIG. The front view which shows an example of the game board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 5A is a diagram showing an example of a 7-segment display unit provided in the game board shown in FIG. 4, and FIG. 5B is a diagram showing a correspondence relationship between game setting values and display examples of the 7-segment display unit. FIG. 5C is a diagram showing a correspondence relationship between the on / off state of each segment of the 7-segment display unit and the display numbers on the 7-segment display unit. The block diagram which shows an example of the system configuration | structure of the gaming machine shown in FIG. The block diagram which shows an example of the memory area of the main controller of the gaming machine shown in FIG. The figure which shows an example of the table used with a main controller. The figure which shows an example of the table used with a main controller. The block diagram which shows an example of the memory area of a main controller. The figure which shows typically an example of the performance information display apparatus of a main controller. The figure which shows the example of a display in the performance display monitor of a performance information display apparatus. The figure which shows the example of a display in the game setting value display part of a performance information display apparatus. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the main timer interruption process performed with a main controller. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the start winning process performed by the main timer interruption process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the 1st pending | holding command setting process performed by the start winning process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the main process performed with a main controller. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the variable game control process performed by the main process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the data setting process performed by the variable game control process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the change start process performed by the change game control process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the game setting value change process performed by the main process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the specific performance information update process performed by the main process of FIG. The figure which shows an example of the base information updated by the specific performance information update process of FIG. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of a display control process of the performance display monitor executed in the main process of FIG. 17. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of a display control process of the performance display monitor executed in the main process of FIG. 17. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of a display control process of the performance display monitor executed in the main process of FIG. 17. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of a display control process of the performance display monitor executed in the main process of FIG. 17. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the sub timer interruption process performed with the audio | voice lamp control apparatus of the gaming machine shown in FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the command determination process performed by the sub timer interruption process of FIG. The figure which shows an example of the 1st stop symbol selection table used when a fluctuation pattern command is received in the command determination process of FIG. 29, and a fluctuation type table. The figure which shows an example of the fluctuation | variation classification table used when the fluctuation | variation pattern command is received in the command determination process of FIG. FIG. 30 is a diagram showing an example of a normal reach effect pattern type selection table used when a variation pattern command is received in the command determination process of FIG. 29. The figure which shows an example of the super reach | attainment effect pattern classification selection table used when the fluctuation pattern command is received in the command determination process of FIG. FIG. 30 is a diagram showing an example of a special reach effect pattern type selection table used when a variation pattern command is received in the command determination process of FIG. 29. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the operation detection process performed by the sub timer interruption process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the operation button operation detection process performed by the operation detection process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the operation detection pattern determination process performed by the operation detection process of FIG. A table showing a relationship between a detection pattern and an operation status. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the jackpot game process performed by the sub timer interruption process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the opening / closing execution mode effect determination process performed by the jackpot game process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the 1R round game effect determination process performed by the opening / closing execution mode effect determination process of FIG. The figure which shows an example of the 1R round game screen in the opening / closing execution mode of jackpot game. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a 2R round game effect determination process executed in the opening / closing execution mode effect determination process of FIG. 40; FIG. 44A is a diagram showing a display example on the 7-segment display section in the jackpot game, and FIG. 44B is a diagram showing an example of the 2R round game screen in the jackpot game opening / closing execution mode. The figure which shows an example of the 3R round game screen of 4R in the opening / closing execution mode of jackpot game. The figure which shows an example of the table referred in order to determine the 3R round and 4R round game effects in the opening / closing execution mode effect determination processing of FIG. The figure which shows an example of the screen transfer in the symbol display part in a standby state. The figure which shows an example of the display screen in the symbol display part in a standby state. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the standby state process performed by the sub timer interruption process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the standby state process performed by the sub timer interruption process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the game mode selection process performed by the standby state process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the prediction change process performed by the standby state process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the segment change process performed by the standby state process of FIG.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings for understanding of the present invention. The following embodiments are examples embodying the present invention, and do not limit the technical scope of the present invention.

[First Embodiment]
First, the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS.

[Schematic configuration of gaming machine 10]
Here, FIG. 1 is an external perspective view of the gaming machine 10, FIGS. 2 and 3 are development views of the gaming machine 10, and FIG. 4 is a front view of the gaming board 31 of the gaming machine 10. Hereinafter, the front-rear, left-right, and upper-lower expressions used in the present embodiment are defined by the front-rear direction D1, the up-down direction D2, and the left-right direction D3 shown in FIGS.

  As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the gaming machine 10 is a pachinko gaming machine that includes a front frame 11, an inner frame 12, a back pack unit 13, and an outer frame 14, and is installed in an island facility (not shown) of the gaming hall. The outer frame 14 is fixed and installed in the game hall. In the present embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine will be described as an example of a gaming machine. However, other examples such as a spinning cylinder gaming machine (slot machine), an arrangement ball gaming machine, and a ballball gaming machine are used. The present invention can also be applied to gaming machines.

[Configuration of Front Frame 11]
The front frame 11 can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 14 by the left end portion being rotatably supported by the outer frame 14. Further, the inner frame 12 can be opened and closed with respect to the front frame 11 by the left end portion being rotatably supported by the front frame 11. Further, the back pack unit 13 can be opened and closed with respect to the inner frame 12 by the left end portion being rotatably supported by the inner frame 12.

  The front frame 11 includes an operation button 20, a firing handle 22, an upper plate 23, a lower plate 24, a panel 25, a speaker 26, and an electrical decoration unit 27.

  The front frame 11 includes an operation button 20, a selection determination unit 21, a firing handle 22, an upper plate 23, a lower plate 24, a panel 25, a speaker 26, an illumination unit 27, and the like.

  The operation button 20 is provided in front of the upper plate 23. The operation button 20 includes an operation switch 20a (see FIG. 6) such as a contact switch that switches an input signal to the sound lamp control device 5 according to whether or not a pressing operation is performed. As a result, the sound lamp control device 5 can determine whether or not the operation button 20 is operated. The operation button 20 is operated to execute an operation button effect or the like that is executed when the player operates the operation button 20 in a predetermined operation period in the variable game effect. The operation button 20 is operated to shift the display screen on the symbol display unit 341 described later from the change stop screen to a top menu screen (see FIG. 47) for performing various settings.

  Note that the installation position of the operation button 20 is not limited to the front of the upper plate 23, and may be any position on the front frame 11 as long as the player can operate the operation button 20. Further, the number of operation buttons 20 is not limited to one and may be two or more. Furthermore, the operation switch 20a is not limited to the contact type switch and may be, for example, a piezoelectric element as long as it can be used to detect the presence or absence of an operation by the player.

  Further, instead of the operation buttons 20, a touch panel that displays a touch key and accepts an operation by a player of the touch key may be provided. Further, instead of the operation buttons 20, a panel 25 and a touch sensor that detects a player's touch operation on the panel 25 may be provided. The operation button 20 may be provided with a jog dial. In these cases, the player's operation on the touch panel or the panel 25 is reflected in the operation button effect or the like in the variable game effect.

  The selection deciding unit 21 is operated by the player, and in an event prediction game (see FIG. 45, etc.) that causes the player to predict an event that may occur during the progress of the game in a predetermined period described later, the player This is a push button that accepts a pressing operation. The selection determination unit 21 includes a plurality of selection buttons 21A and a determination button 21B.

  The plurality of selection buttons 21A are operated by the player to temporarily select a desired item from options (items) such as a top menu screen (see FIG. 39) in the game setting process. , A lower selection button 212, a left selection button 213, and a right selection button 214. Here, the provisional selection means that the provisionally selected content is confirmed (stored in the RAM 512) by operating the determination button 21B. Each of these selection buttons 211 to 214 has an upper selection operation switch 211a, a lower selection operation switch 211b, a left selection operation switch 211c, and a right selection operation switch 211d (FIG. 6) for switching an input signal to the sound lamp control device 5 described later. See). As a result, the sound lamp control device 5 can determine whether or not an operation has been performed on each of the selection buttons 211 to 214.

  In the present embodiment, when it is detected that an operation for each of the selection buttons 211 to 214 is started, it is determined that the operation for each of the selection buttons 211 to 214 has been performed. Of course, when it is detected that the operation for each of the selection buttons 211 to 214 is continued or the operation has been completed, it may be determined that the operation for each of the selection buttons 211 to 214 has been performed. .

  On the other hand, the determination button 21B is operated by the player to determine the provisionally selected item. The determination button 21B includes a determination operation switch 21Ba for switching an input signal to the sound lamp control device 5 described later. As a result, the sound lamp control device 5 can determine whether or not an operation has been performed on the determination button 21B.

  Further, instead of the plurality of selection buttons 21 </ b> A (211 to 214) and the determination button 21 </ b> B, a touch panel that displays a touch key and receives a player's operation on the touch key may be provided as an operation unit. Further, instead of the plurality of selection buttons 21 </ b> A (211 to 214) and the determination button 21 </ b> B, a translucent touch panel that accepts a player's operation may be provided on the front side of the symbol display unit 341. It is also conceivable to provide a jog dial instead of the plurality of selection buttons 21A (211 to 214). The selection switches 211a to 211d and the determination operation switch 21Ba are contact type switches or the like, but may be piezoelectric elements or the like as long as they can be used to detect the presence or absence of an operation by the player. .

  The launch handle 22 is a rotary handle that is operated by a player to launch a game ball. In the gaming machine 10, a basic game is performed by launching a game ball from a later-described game ball launching mechanism 32 with a strength corresponding to the amount of rotation operation of the launch handle 22 by the player. In the gaming machine 10, in a situation where the launch handle 22 is operated by the player, the game ball launching mechanism 32 is driven and controlled so that, for example, one game ball is launched toward the game area every 0.6 sec. .

  The upper plate 23 is disposed below the panel 25, stores game balls paid out from a payout device 132 of the payout mechanism 130 described later, and aligns the stored game balls in one row. Used to guide to the game ball launching mechanism 32. In addition, the lower tray 24 is provided further below the upper tray 23 and is used for storing game balls surplus in the upper tray 23.

  The panel 25 is a colorless transparent or colored transparent glass or synthetic resin that allows the player to visually recognize the game board 31 of the inner frame 12 from the front of the gaming machine 10. The speakers 26 are a pair of speakers provided on the left and right of the upper end portion of the front frame 11 and execute a sound output effect that outputs sound. The installation position of the speaker 26 is not limited to the upper end portion of the front frame 11. Moreover, the illumination part 27 incorporates light sources, such as a display lamp and LED, and performs lamp production | presentation by the blinking aspects, such as lighting color and lighting or light extinction.

[Configuration of inner frame 12]
As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the inner frame 12 includes a game board 31, a game ball launching mechanism 32, and a control unit 33. In FIG. 2, description on the board surface of the game board 31 is omitted for simplification of illustration.

  The control unit 33 includes a main control unit 331 and a sub control unit 332. In the gaming machine 10, a command (control signal) for instructing the control content is transmitted from the main control unit 331 to the sub control unit 332 in one direction. Details of the main control unit 331 and the sub control unit 332 will be described later.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the game board 31 includes an inner rail 311, an outer rail 312, a general winning port 313, a first winning port 314, a second winning port 315, a variable winning port 316, a through gate 317, and an out port 318. A variable display unit 34 and a 7-segment display unit 39 are provided.

  The inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312 are transport paths for sending out the game balls launched from the game ball launching mechanism 32 toward the game area on the surface of the game board 31. Then, after being fired from the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312, the game balls that have not entered the general winning port 313, the first winning port 314, the second winning port 315, or the variable winning port 316 are discharged from the out port 318. Is done.

  Here, the game ball launching mechanism 32 includes a firing rail 321, a ball feeding device 322, and a solenoid 323 as shown in FIG. 2. The launch rail 321 is formed from the game ball launch mechanism 32 toward the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312 of the game board 31, and game balls launched from the game ball launch mechanism 32 are transferred to the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312. It is a guide. The ball feeder 322 has a driving means such as a solenoid, and supplies the game balls stored in the upper plate 23 onto the firing rail 321 one by one. The solenoid 323 is a driving unit that launches the game balls supplied on the firing rail 321 toward the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312. In the gaming machine 10, the solenoid 323 is driven and controlled in accordance with the operation of the launch handle 22 by the player, and the game ball is launched from the game ball launch mechanism 32 to the game board 31. The game ball launching mechanism 32 may be a mechanism that launches a game ball using other driving means such as a motor instead of the solenoid 323.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 4, the general winning port 313, the first winning port 314, the second winning port 315, the variable winning port 316, and the out port 318 are formed with openings that penetrate the game board 31 in the front-rear direction. ing. In addition, on the back side of the game board 31, game balls can be detected individually corresponding to the general winning port 313, the first winning port 314, the second winning port 315, and the variable winning port 316. Entrance sensors 313a, 314a, 315a, 316a (see FIG. 6) are provided. In addition, the game balls that have passed through the openings of the general winning port 313, the first winning port 314, the second winning port 315, and the out port 318 are collected on the back side of the game board 31 to be described later. (See FIG. 6). In addition, the variable winning opening 316 is provided at the right center portion of the game board 31, and a game ball launched into the right area of the game board 31 can enter. The through gate 317 is a gate through which a game ball can pass, and has a ball entrance sensor 317a (see FIG. 6) that can individually detect the game ball passing through the through gate 317. In the game board 31, there is a possibility that a game ball launched into the right area of the game board 31 may pass through the through gate 317, and the second prize opening is triggered by the passage of the game ball at the through gate 317 being detected. A lottery is performed per usual figure for determining whether or not to open 315.

  The entrance sensors 313a to 317a and the out ball sensor 35 (see FIG. 6) are electrically connected to the main control unit 331, and the detection results of the entrance sensors 313a to 317a and the out ball sensor 35 are sent to the main control unit 331. Entered. The main control unit 331 (MPU 41) transmits a command for causing the payout control device 7 to pay out the game ball according to the detection results of the ball entering sensors 313a to 317a. Hereinafter, detection of a game ball by the ball sensors 313a to 317a may be referred to as winning. The main control unit 331 (MPU 41) counts the number of out balls based on the detection result of the out ball sensor 35. The number of out balls counted here coincides with the number of game balls launched on the game board 31 by the game ball launch mechanism 32.

  Note that the incoming ball sensors 313a to 317a and the out ball sensor 35 are, for example, electromagnetic induction type proximity sensors, but are arbitrary sensors that can individually detect the incoming ball of the game ball by other detection methods. May be.

  In addition, the second winning opening 315 is provided with an electric accessory 315b for switching whether or not the game ball is restricted to enter the second winning opening 315. The electric accessory 315b is opened and closed by a driving means such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the game board 31. Then, in the game board 31, the game ball can enter the second prize opening 315 by opening the electric accessory 315 b, and the game ball can enter the second prize opening 315 by closing the electric accessory 315 b. The sphere is restricted.

  Further, the variable winning opening 316 is provided with an opening / closing door 319 for switching whether or not the game ball is restricted to be entered into the variable winning opening 316. The opening / closing door 319 is opened and closed by a driving means such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the game board 31. In the game board 31, the opening of the opening / closing door 319 makes it possible to enter a game ball into the variable winning opening 316, and the closing of the opening / closing door 319 restricts the entry of the gaming ball into the variable winning opening 316. The Note that the open / close door 319 is moved to a position where the variable prize opening 316 is opened in a round game in the open / close execution mode in the jackpot game, and otherwise, the open / close door 319 stands by at a position where the variable prize opening 316 is closed. Thereby, the game ball 99 launched into the right region of the game board 31 in the round game in the jackpot game can enter the variable winning opening 316.

  In the gaming machine 10, a big hit lottery is performed by the main control unit 331 when the entrance of a game ball into the first winning port 314 or the second winning port 315 is detected by the incoming sensor 314 a or the incoming sensor 315 a. And the main control unit 331 controls the display of the main display part 37 according to the lottery result in the big hit lottery. The lottery result by the main control unit 331 is transmitted to the sub control unit 332, and the sub control unit 332 controls the display of the variable display unit 34 according to the lottery result.

  In addition, in the gaming machine 10, when the entrance of the game ball to the general winning port 313, the first winning port 314, the second winning port 315 and the variable winning port 316 is detected by the winning sensors 313a to 316a, A set number of prize balls are paid out. For example, the number of winning balls when entering the general winning opening 313 is 10, and the number of winning balls when entering the first winning opening 314 and the second winning opening 315 is 3, and entering the variable winning opening 316 In this case, the number of prize balls is 13. In particular, in the gaming machine 10, when the lottery result performed in the main control unit 331 is a jackpot, the game machine 10 shifts to a jackpot game state (special game state), and a round game (unit game) described later in which the variable winning opening 316 is opened. ) Is repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times and 16 times), a large amount of prize balls can be expected to be paid out.

  Further, when a game ball enters the first winning port 314 or the second winning port 315, a big hit lottery is executed. When the lottery result is a big win, the game shifts to a predetermined big win gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. In the present embodiment, the jackpot gaming state includes a 5R jackpot gaming state (5R normal jackpot gaming state and 5R probability variable jackpot gaming state) and 16R probability jackpot gaming state. In the 5R jackpot gaming state, five round games (unit games) in which the variable winning opening 316 is opened until a predetermined time elapses or until a maximum number of game balls (for example, 9) or more are won in the variable winning opening 316. It is a gaming state including an opening / closing execution mode to be performed. The 16R probability variable jackpot game state is a game state including an open / close execution mode in which round games (unit games) are performed 16 times, and a larger amount of prize balls can be expected than the 5R jackpot game state, and more than the 5R jackpot game state. This is a gaming state that is advantageous to the player.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the variable display unit 34 has a symbol display unit 341 such as a liquid crystal display disposed so as to be visible through an opening 31 </ b> A formed in a substantially central portion of the game board 31. The symbol display unit 341 displays a still image or a moving image, and the display content of the symbol display unit 341 is controlled by the sub-control unit 332. Specifically, in the symbol display unit 341, the symbol change display and the variable game according to the lottery result in the big hit lottery performed by the main control unit 331 in response to the first winning port 314 or the second winning port 315 entered. Various displays such as effect display are performed. The symbol display unit 341 may be a dot matrix display, a plasma display, an organic EL display, or the like, or a combination of a liquid crystal display or a plasma display and an organic EL display.

  For example, the symbol variation display in the symbol display unit 341 is performed by sequentially scrolling, for example, a plurality of types of decorative symbols having numbers “1” to “9” in the vertical direction, the horizontal direction, the diagonal direction, and the like. It should be noted that sub-designs (blank symbols) that do not constitute jackpot combinations such as other characters or symbols may be displayed between the decorative symbols. Further, in the present embodiment, there are no sub-designs, and there are nine types of decorative designs “1” to “9”.

  In the gaming machine 10, in the variable game, the symbol variation display is executed so that the variation of all the decorative symbols is stopped after a preset variation display time has elapsed from the start of the symbol variation display in the symbol display unit 341. . More specifically, in the symbol variation display, first, all the ornamental symbols vary along a preset variation direction (for example, the horizontal direction, the vertical direction, etc.), and the variation of the plurality of ornamental symbols stops in order. Then, when the variation of the decorative symbols in all the lines is stopped and a predetermined time elapses, the symbol variation display ends.

  When the symbol variation display in the symbol display unit 341 ends, the symbol display unit 341 displays a state in which decorative symbols are arranged on one or more effective lines. At this time, the stop state of the decorative symbol clearly or suggests the lottery result in the big hit lottery by the main control unit 331. For example, when the lottery result is “5R probability variation jackpot”, “16R probability variation jackpot”, or “5R normal variation jackpot”, a state in which decorative symbols of the same symbol are arranged in an active line is displayed, and it is clearly indicated that it is a jackpot Is done. The jackpot type may be clearly indicated by a combination of decorative symbols on the active line, but it is not always clearly indicated. Specifically, for example, in the case where the lottery result is “16R probability variation jackpot”, the symbol combination which is set as a symbol combination indicating 16R probability variation jackpot among the decorative symbols, for example, “777” symbol combinations arranged in an active line Or a combination of the same symbols other than “777” arranged in an active line. In addition, when the lottery result is “5R probability variation jackpot”, symbols such as “333”, which are set in advance as a symbol combination indicating 5R probability variation jackpot, are displayed in an activated line. Alternatively, the same symbol combinations other than the symbol combinations indicating 16R probability variation jackpots or 5R probability variation jackpots such as “777” and “333” are displayed in a state where they are arranged in an active line. Further, when the lottery result is “5R normal jackpot”, a combination other than a combination of symbols indicating a probable jackpot such as “222” or “444”, which is set in advance as a symbol combination indicating a normal jackpot among decorative symbols. A state in which combinations of the same symbols are arranged on an active line is displayed. In addition, when the lottery result is “off”, a state in which different combinations of decorative symbols are arranged on the active line (for example, “323” (reach miss) or “723” (separate eyes)) is displayed.

  In addition, the symbol display unit 341 displays a variable game effect that suggests the degree of expectation that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery will be a jackpot, along with the display of the decorative symbols in the variable game. In addition, when the lottery result is “16R probability variation jackpot”, when a jackpot symbol combination other than “777”, which is a combination of decorative symbols indicating 16R probability variation jackpot, is displayed in a state where it is aligned on the active line, the floating game effect As a result, a suggestion effect that suggests a 5R probability variation jackpot or a 5R normal jackpot is executed. In this case, in the jackpot game effect, a promotion effect that clearly indicates that the lottery result for the variable game is a 16R probability variable jackpot is executed. Similarly, when the lottery result is “5R probability variation jackpot”, other than “333” which is a combination of decorative symbols indicating a probability variation jackpot (except for “777” which is a combination of ornament symbols clearly indicating that it is a 16R probability variation jackpot) When the jackpot symbol combination is displayed in a state where it is aligned on the active line, a suggestion effect that suggests that it is a 5R normal jackpot is executed as the variable game effect. In this case, in the jackpot game effect, a promotion effect that clearly indicates that the lottery result for the variable game is a 5R probability variable jackpot is executed. Further, the execution timing of the promotion effect may be executed during the variable game effect. For example, in the promotion effect, after the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in the variable game effect, the decorative symbol “777”, which is a combination of the decorative symbol that clearly indicates that it is a 16R probability variation jackpot, or the decorative symbol that clearly indicates that it is a 5R probability variation jackpot. This may be executed by finally stopping and displaying “333”, which is a combination of the above.

  Furthermore, when the game state is shifted to the jackpot game state, the symbol display unit 341 displays a jackpot game effect including an opening effect, an opening / closing execution mode effect, and an ending effect.

  It is also conceivable that the game board 31 is provided with a magnet sensor or a radio wave sensor (both not shown). The magnet sensor is provided, for example, around the first winning opening 314 and the variable winning opening 316. The magnet sensor is electrically connected to the main control unit, and the detection result of the magnet sensor is input to the main control unit 331. As a result, when an act of guiding the game ball to the first winning opening 314 or the variable winning opening 316 is performed illegally using a magnet, it is possible to detect the fraud. On the other hand, the radio wave sensor is provided, for example, around the first winning port 314 and the second winning port 315. The radio wave sensor is electrically connected to the main control unit 331, and the detection result of the radio wave sensor is input to the main control unit 331. As a result, when an act of illegally inputting a radio wave to the incoming ball sensors 314a and 315a and erroneously detecting the incoming ball of the game ball is performed, the illegal act can be detected. Note that the radio wave sensor can detect radio waves of 50 MHz to 3 GHz, for example.

  Here, FIG. 5A is a diagram showing an example of the 7-segment display unit 39 provided on the game board 31 shown in FIG. 4, and FIG. 5B is a display example of the game setting value and the 7-segment display unit 39. FIG. 5C is a diagram showing the correspondence between the on / off states of the segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39 and the display numbers on the 7-segment display unit 39. . Here, the game setting value defines the probability that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery in the low probability mode and the high probability mode will be a jackpot (the jackpot probability), that is, the success / failure table type referred to in the jackpot lottery as will be described later. Yes (see FIGS. 8A and 8B). In the present embodiment, for each of the low probability mode and the high probability mode, six success / failure tables (six stages of game settings 1 to 6) having different jackpot probabilities are provided. The game setting value has a jackpot probability that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot in the order of the game setting value 6, the game setting value 5, the game setting value 4, the game setting value 3, the game setting value 2 and the game setting value 1. Highly advantageous to the player. Note that the game setting value is not limited to six levels, but may be two or more levels.

  As shown in FIG. 5A, the 7-segment display unit 39 includes seven segments A to G and dot points DP. Each of the segments A to G and the dot point DP can be turned on and off individually, and can be blinked by repeating the turning on and off in a single time. Each segment A to G may be lit in one color or in a plurality of colors. The 7-segment display unit 39 displays numbers and alphabetic symbols corresponding to game setting values stored in the RAM 412 of the main control device 4 with segments that are lit in a specific color during a specific period in the jackpot game. The game setting value can be specified, and the game setting value can be suggested by displaying a part of the symbol in the specific color. In the present embodiment, as described later, the game setting value is displayed by displaying a number corresponding to the game setting value in a specific color in a specific period from the 2R round game in the opening / closing execution mode in the jackpot game to the end of the jackpot game. The game setting value can be suggested by displaying a part of the number corresponding to the game setting value in a specific color. Further, in the 7-segment display unit 39, as described later, the virtual coins acquired by the player correctly answering the event prediction in the event prediction game that allows the player to predict an event that may occur during the progress of the game in a predetermined period. The segments A to G selected by the player according to the value (number of sheets) are controlled to be turned on or off with a specific color. That is, in the 7-segment display unit 39, as the value of the virtual coin acquired by correctly answering the event prediction by the player increases, more segments A to G are controlled to be turned on or off with a specific color. be able to. When the player acquires a virtual coin of a certain value or more, all the segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39 can be controlled to be turned on / off, and all the segments A to G are turned on / off. In the case of being controlled, the game setting value is clearly indicated by displaying the whole number corresponding to the game setting value in the specific color on the 7-segment display unit 39.

  In the 7-segment display unit 39, the game setting values are clearly indicated or suggested by turning on or off each segment A to G in a specific period of the jackpot game. When some of the segments are controlled and game setting values are suggested, segments that are not controlled (uncontrolled segments) have, for example, one type of lighting color for each of the segments A to G Can be considered to flash the uncontrolled target segment in a specific color, and when there are a plurality of types of lighting colors of the segments A to G, the uncontrolled target segment is lit or flashed in a predetermined color different from the specific color A mode to be considered is conceivable. Of course, the uncontrolled segment may be turned off. In this embodiment, the uncontrolled segment is lit in a predetermined color. Further, the predetermined color is preferably a color that is less noticeable than the specific color, and a high brightness color, for example, a light color is conceivable.

  In the present embodiment, the segments A to G that are controlled in the specific period of the jackpot game are turned on or off in a specific color, but there are a plurality of types of lighting colors of the segments A to G. Alternatively, the control target segments A to G may be turned on with a specified color different from the specific color and the predetermined color instead of turning off the control target segments A to G. In this case, in the specific period of the jackpot game, the segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39 are turned on in any one of the specific color, the predetermined color, and the specified color, so that the control target segments A to G can be turned off. Compared to, it becomes difficult to guess the number corresponding to the game setting value. By the way, if it is easy to guess the game setting value, there is a concern that if the game setting value is a low setting value (when the jackpot probability is low), the player will end the game on the gaming machine 10 early. The On the other hand, since it becomes difficult to guess the number corresponding to the game setting value in the 7-segment display unit 39 in the jackpot game, it is possible to increase the difficulty of guessing the game setting value. Therefore, in the specific period of the jackpot game, without turning off any of the segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39, each segment A to G is turned on in one of a specific color, a predetermined color, and a specified color. By increasing the difficulty of estimating the set value, it is possible to prevent the player from ending the game on the gaming machine 10 at an early stage when the game set value is a low set value (when the jackpot probability is low). Furthermore, when the segments A to G are lit in any one of the specific color, the predetermined color, and the specified color in the specific period of the jackpot game, the specific color, the predetermined color, and the specified color may be a predetermined fixed color. However, a plurality of predetermined colors may be selected when determining the control states of the segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39 in the specific period. In the latter case, the number corresponding to the game setting value, that is, the difficulty of guessing the game setting value can be further increased. Therefore, when the game setting value is a low setting value (when the jackpot probability is low), the player It is possible to further prevent the game on the gaming machine 10 from ending at an early stage.

  In addition, the specific period in which the game setting value is clearly indicated or suggested by the 7-segment display unit 39 in the jackpot game is not limited to the period from the round game in the opening / closing execution mode 2R to the end of the jackpot game, but the opening period, the opening / closing execution mode In addition to the period and the ending period, two or more of these three periods may be combined.

  Here, the segment A can be lit in a specific color when the game setting value is 2, 3, 5 or 6. Therefore, it can be determined that the game setting value is 2, 3, 5 or 6 when the segment A is lit in a specific color, and the game setting value is determined when the segment A is turned off as a control target. It can be determined that it is either 1 or 4 (see FIG. 5C). That is, when the segment A is lit in a specific color, the game setting value 1 that is the most unfavorable for the player is denied, and there is a possibility that the game setting values 5 and 6 are advantageous to the player. On the other hand, when the segment A is turned off as a control target, there is a possibility that the game setting value 1 is the most disadvantageous for the player. Therefore, when the segment A is lit in a specific color, the game setting value 1 is denied and the possibility of the game setting values 5 and 6 remains, so there is a possibility that the game setting value is advantageous for the player. Relatively high.

  The segment B can be lit in a specific color when the game setting value is 1, 2, 3 or 4. Therefore, when segment B is lit in a specific color, it can be determined that the game setting value is any one of 1, 2, 3, and 4, and when segment B is turned off as a control target, the game setting value is It can be determined that it is either 5 or 6 (see FIG. 5C). That is, when the segment B is turned off, it is determined that the game setting value 5 or 6 is advantageous to the player for the player. Therefore, whether or not the segment B is lit is an extremely important factor in determining whether or not the game setting value is advantageous for the player.

  The segment C can be lit in a specific color when the game setting value is 1, 3, 4, 5 or 6. Therefore, it can be determined that the game setting value is any one of 1, 3, 4, 5 and 6 when the segment C is turned on, and the game setting value is 2 when the segment C is turned off as a control target. (See FIG. 5C). That is, when the segment C is lit in a specific color, the game setting value 2 which is relatively unfavorable for the player is denied, but whether the player is in an advantageous state is determined by the game setting values 5 and 6. While the possibility is left, the possibility of the game setting value 1 is also left at the same time. For this reason, it is difficult to determine whether or not the segment C is lit alone, which is an advantageous game setting value for the player. In this sense, the importance of the segment C is low. This is important in making a judgment in combination with the fact whether or not the other segment is lit in a specific color when another segment is a control target. For example, when the segment E is lit in a specific color as the other segment, it can be determined that it is one of the game setting values 2 and 6 as described later. Therefore, when the segment C is lit in a specific color and the segment E is lit in a specific color, it is determined that the game setting value 6 is most advantageous for the player. On the other hand, when the segment C is controlled but does not light up and the segment E lights up in a specific color, it is determined that the game setting value 2 is relatively unfavorable for the player.

  The segment D can be lit in a specific color when the game setting value is 2, 3, 5 or 6. Therefore, it can be determined that the game setting value is 2, 3, 5 or 6 when the segment D is lit in a specific color, and the game setting value is determined when the segment D is turned off as a control target. It can be determined that it is either 1 or 4 (see FIG. 5C). That is, when the segment D is lit in a specific color, similarly to the segment A, the game setting value 1 that is most unfavorable to the player is denied, and there is a possibility that the game setting values 5 and 6 are advantageous to the player. Rise. Therefore, it can be determined that the fact that the segment D is lit in a specific color is likely to be in an advantageous state for the player. Conversely, when the segment D is turned off as a control target, It can be judged that there is a high possibility of being in a disadvantageous state for the person.

  The segment E can be lit in a specific color when the game setting value is 2 or 6. Therefore, it can be determined that the game setting value is either 2 or 6 when the segment E is lit in a specific color, and the game setting value is 1, 3, when the segment E is turned off as a control target. 4 and 5 can be determined (see FIG. 5C). That is, since the possibility that the game setting value 6 is left when the segment E is lit in a specific color remains, the game setting value 6 is affirmed by the other segment simultaneously with the segment E and the game setting value 2 is denied. Thus, it can be determined whether or not the game setting value 6 is most advantageous for the player. For example, when the segment B is turned off as a control target, the segment C is lit in a specific color, and the segment F is lit in a specific color, the game setting value 6 is affirmed and the game setting value Since 2 is negated, the segment E is lit in a specific color when any of these conditions is satisfied, so that the game setting value 6 is determined.

  The segment F can be lit in a specific color when the game setting value is 4, 5 or 6. Therefore, it can be determined that the game setting value is any of 4, 5 and 6 when the segment F is lit in a specific color, and the game setting value is 1 when the segment F is turned off as a control target. It can be determined that it is either 2 or 3 (see FIG. 5C). That is, when the segment F is lit in a specific color, it can be determined that the top three game setting values 4, 5 or 6 are advantageous to the player. On the contrary, when the segment F is controlled and turned off, it can be determined that the lower three game setting values 1, 2 or 3 are disadvantageous for the player. Therefore, the level of the game setting value can be determined based on whether or not the segment F is turned on as a control target, so that the player can determine whether or not to continue the game on the gaming machine 10 that is currently playing a game. It becomes easy to judge.

  The segment G can be lit in a specific color when the game setting values are 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6. Therefore, it can be determined that the game setting value is any one of 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6 when the segment G is lit in a specific color, and the game setting is performed when the segment G is turned off as a control target. It can be determined that the value is 1 (see FIG. 5C). That is, whether or not the game setting value 1 is the most unfavorable for the player can be determined by whether or not the segment G is turned on as a control target. Therefore, since the game setting value 1 is determined when the segment G is turned off as a control target, the player is given an opportunity to end the game in the gaming machine 10 that is currently playing the game. .

  As described above, the segments A to G are not the same in importance in estimating the game setting value, but are different in importance. For example, segments A to G are different in the ease of guessing the game setting value itself, the ease of judging the level of the game setting value alone, and the game setting value by combining with other segments And the ease of guessing the height is different. Therefore, the ease of guessing the game setting value differs depending on the order in which the segments are to be controlled. And in this embodiment, the segment used as a control object is a segment selected by the player among the segments AG. Therefore, the player controls which segment A to G according to information he wants to know, such as the level of the game setting value, the possibility of a specific game setting value (for example, the possibility of the game setting value 6), and the like. It becomes possible to obtain information desired to know by selecting these as control targets. Then, the player can consider whether or not to continue the game based on the information obtained regarding the game setting value.

  The control target segments A to G may not be selected by the player and may be determined by the gaming machine 10. In this case, it is considered that the control target segments A to G are determined in the order corresponding to the control target order after the control target priority order of the segments A to G is determined according to the game setting value. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the game setting value from being easily guessed when the value of the virtual coin acquired by the player is low, and it is possible to prevent the game in the gaming machine 10 during the game from being terminated early. In addition, when the control target segments A to G are determined in the gaming machine 10, it may be determined at random by the lottery in the gaming machine 10 without prescribing the control target order of the segments A to G. Further, when the control target segments A to G are determined by lottery, the selection rates of the segments A to G may be uniform, but the selection rate of at least one segment may be different from the selection rates of other segments. The selection rate may be set according to a game setting value. For example, it is conceivable to increase the selection rate of a segment for which it is difficult to estimate a game setting value, while decreasing the selection rate of a segment for which a game setting value is easy to estimate. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the game setting value from being easily guessed when the value of the virtual coin acquired by the player is low, and it is possible to prevent the game in the gaming machine 10 during the game from being terminated early.

  Further, the control target segments A to G may be determined according to a control order pattern that defines the control order of the segments A to G. When the control target segment is determined according to the control order pattern, a plurality of control order patterns having different control orders are prepared, and the control target segment is determined according to the control order pattern selected from these control order patterns. The control order pattern may be set according to the game setting value. When a segment to be controlled is determined according to a control order pattern selected from a plurality of control order patterns, the selection rate of the control order pattern that makes it difficult to guess the game setting value is increased, while the guess of the game setting value is It is conceivable to reduce the selectivity of an easy control sequence pattern. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the game setting value from being easily guessed when the value of the virtual coin acquired by the player is low, and it is possible to prevent the game in the gaming machine 10 during the game from being terminated early.

  Further, when the control target segments A to G are determined in the gaming machine 10, which segment A to G in the seven segment display unit 39 is the control target segments A to G may be clearly indicated to the player or explicitly indicated. You don't have to. When the control target segments A to G are specified, it is easier to guess the game setting value than when the control target segments A to G are not specified. And in this embodiment, since control object segment AG is selected by the player, control object segment AG is specified. For example, the control target segments A to G may be blinked to indicate to the player that they are the control target segments A to G, or the control target segments may be specified on the symbol display unit 341.

[Back pack unit 13]
As shown in FIG. 3, the back pack unit 13 includes a payout mechanism 130 and a peripheral control unit 140.

  The payout mechanism 130 includes a tank 131 that stores ball game balls supplied from an island facility (not shown) of the game hall, and a payout device 132 that pays out game balls from the tank 131 toward the upper plate 23. When the game balls on the upper plate 23 are saturated, the game balls paid out from the payout device 132 are paid out to the lower plate 24.

  As shown in FIG. 6, the peripheral control unit 140 includes a payout control device 7, a launch control device 8, and a power supply control device 9. The payout control device 7 controls the number of game balls paid out by the payout device 132 and the like. The launch control device 8 controls the game ball launch mechanism 32 in accordance with the operation of the launch handle 22. The power supply control device 9 converts electric power supplied from an island facility (not shown) to which the gaming machine 10 is connected to a predetermined voltage level, and supplies it to a control device and driving means provided in the gaming machine 10.

[System configuration of gaming machine 10]
Next, the system configuration of the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS.

[Main control unit 331]
As shown in FIG. 6, the main control unit 331 includes a main control device 4 that executes main control of the game in the gaming machine 10. Main controller 4 executes a jackpot lottery as a lottery for shifting to a preset jackpot gaming state. The main control device 4 includes an MPU 41, an input / output I / F 42, and a performance information display device 4A.

  The MPU 41 is an arithmetic unit configured as a one-chip microcomputer. The MPU 41 includes a ROM 411 and a RAM 412. The MPU 41 executes processing according to a control program stored in the ROM 411 or the like. Further, part or all of the processing executed by the main control device 4 may be executed by an electronic circuit.

  The input / output I / F 42 is an input / output interface that inputs a signal to the main control device 4 and outputs a control signal from the main control device 4. Further, the input / output I / F 42 is connected to the ball entering sensors 313a to 317a, the out ball sensor 35, and the like. Then, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a game ball has entered the general winning port 313, the first winning port 314, the second winning port 315, and the variable winning port 316 based on detection signals from the ball sensors 313a to 317a, or Whether or not a game ball has passed through the through gate 317 is determined. Further, the MPU 41 counts the number of out balls (number of fired balls) based on the detection signal from the out ball sensor 35. Furthermore, an audio lamp control device 5, a payout control device 7, a launch control device 8, a power supply control device 9, and the like are connected to the input / output I / F 42.

  Then, the MPU 41 sends a change pattern command, a first hold command, a second hold command, a shift command, a jackpot start command, a round game start command, an ending start command, a jackpot game end command, a game set value to the voice lamp control device 5. Output commands such as change commands.

  The variation pattern command is a command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 of the variation display time and the lottery result in the jackpot lottery, and includes information on the jackpot type when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot. The variation pattern command is set in step S1605 in the variation start process of FIG. 20 described later, based on information stored in a later-described hold storage area 412b when starting the symbol variation display by the main display unit 37. The The variation pattern command may be a command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 of only the variation display time. In this case, a command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 of the lottery result in the jackpot lottery or the jackpot type is set as a command different from the variation pattern command.

  The first hold command and the second hold command include a lottery result, a variation pattern in a jackpot lottery for the increased hold, when the hold number N or the hold number M stored in the hold storage area 412b described later increases. This is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 of the number of holds N or the number of holds M. The first hold command and the second hold command are set based on information stored in a later-described hold storage area 412b when the hold number N or the hold number M increases (see FIG. 16 described later). Step S1207 or step S1209 of the first hold command setting process.

  The shift command indicates the lottery result in the big win lottery in the first reserved area REA1 to the fourth reserved area REA4 or the first reserved area REB1 to the fourth reserved area REB4 when the reserved number N or the reserved number M decreases. This is a command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 that the validity information has shifted. The shift command is set in step S1508 in the data setting process of FIG.

  The jackpot game start command is a command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 that the jackpot game is started, that is, the gaming state is shifted to the jackpot gaming state. This is set in the game state transition process of step S1306 in the main process. Since the jackpot game start command is a command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 that the jackpot game is started, the sound lamp control device 5 receives the jackpot game start command and starts the jackpot game. In addition to this, it can be grasped that the opening is started. However, an opening start command may be set separately from the jackpot start command, and the voice lamp control device 5 may be made aware of the opening being started by the opening start command.

  The round game start command is a command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 of the round number information indicating the start of each round game and the number of rounds in the open / close execution mode in the jackpot game. This is set in the jackpot game control process of step S1305 in the main process of FIG. 17 described later. In addition, in the sound lamp control device 5, it is possible to grasp that the opening is ended by the round game start command and the opening / closing execution mode is started, but separately from the round game start command, an opening end command is set at the end of the opening, Alternatively, the opening / closing execution mode start command may be set when the opening / closing execution mode starts. In addition to the round game start command, a command indicating the number of round games to be started at the time of starting the round game may be set, and the command may be transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5.

  The jackpot game end command is a command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 that the jackpot game is to be ended, and is set in the jackpot game control process of step S1305 in the main process of FIG. 17 described later.

  The game setting value change command is a command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 that the game setting value has been changed and the changed game setting value. Step S1710 in the game setting value changing process of FIG. Set in

  It should be noted that commands other than those described above may be output from the main control device 4 to the sound lamp control device 5, but description thereof will be omitted.

  The main controller 4 is also equipped with an oscillation circuit, a frequency dividing circuit, and the like as means for supplying an operation clock to the MPU 41. The oscillation circuit outputs a clock signal having a predetermined frequency, and the frequency dividing circuit changes the frequency of the clock signal output from the oscillation circuit and inputs it to the MPU 41. Specifically, the execution cycle of a later-described main timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 41 is determined by a clock signal output from the frequency divider circuit.

  In the present embodiment, a clock signal is supplied from the frequency divider circuit to the MPU 41 at a preset interval (for example, 4 msec), and the MPU 41 receives a main timer allocation which will be described later each time the clock signal rises (or falls). Suppose that the process is started and executed. Note that the oscillation circuit and the frequency dividing circuit are mounted on the sub control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140 as necessary, and supply an operation clock mainly controlled by the sub control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140. Further, a clock signal may be supplied from the main control unit 331 to the sub control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140.

  The ROM 411 is a nonvolatile storage unit in which a control program and parameter information are stored in advance. The RAM 412 is a volatile storage unit that can read and write various kinds of information, and is used as a primary storage area (working area) for processing executed by the MPU 41. For example, the RAM 412 is used for setting a command transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 or the like. The RAM 412 may be a nonvolatile storage unit.

  Here, a storage area for the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 of the gaming machine 10 to perform a big win lottery or the like will be described with reference to FIG. Specifically, the MPU 41 uses the counter information stored in the lottery counter 412a, the hold storage area 412b, and the electronic role hold area 412c in the RAM 412 to execute a jackpot lottery and a setting of a variable display time.

  The lottery counter 412a includes a jackpot random number counter C1 used for the lottery for the jackpot winning, a jackpot type counter C2 used for determining the jackpot type, and a reach random number counter C3 used for determining the outage type. included. Further, the lottery counter 412a includes a random number initial value counter CIN1 used for setting an initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and a variation type counter CS1 for determining the variation display time in the main display unit 37 and the symbol display unit 341. It is. Further, in the lottery counter 412a, the normal winning random number counter C4 used for the lottery for determining whether or not the electric winning combination 315b of the second winning prize opening 315 is set to the electric winning open state, and initial values of the normal winning random number counter C4 are set. And a normal initial value counter CIN2 to be used. Hereinafter, when these plural types of counters are collectively described, they are simply referred to as counters.

  The counters C1 to C4, CIN1, CIN2, and CS1 are used as loop counters in which 1 is added to the previous value by the MPU 41 at short time intervals and the value returns to 0 after reaching a preset maximum value. The updated values are recorded in the counters C1 to C4, CIN1, CIN2, and CS1, and are referred to by the MPU 41 during the big win lottery and the setting of the variable display time.

  The reserved storage area 412b includes a first reserved storage area REA, a second reserved storage area REB, and an execution area AE. The first reserved storage area REA includes a first reserved area REA1, a second reserved area REA2, a third reserved area REA3, a fourth reserved area REA4, and a reserved number storage area NAA. Hereinafter, the type of variable game in which the big hit lottery is performed based on each value stored in the first reserved storage area REA and the 7-segment display 372 displays the variable and stops is referred to as a first special symbol game. is there. The second reserved storage area REB includes a first reserved area REB1, a second reserved area REB2, a third reserved area REB3, a fourth reserved area REB4, and a reserved number storage area NAB. Hereinafter, the type of variable game in which the big hit lottery is performed based on each value stored in the second reserved storage area REB and the 7-segment display 373 displays the variable display and the stop display is referred to as a second special symbol game. is there.

  When a game ball enters the first winning opening 314, the information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 stored in the RAM 412 is a jackpot. It is acquired as success / failure information used in the lottery and is stored in any of the first reservation area REA1 to the fourth reservation area REA4 of the first reservation storage area REA. When a game ball enters the second winning opening 315, information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 stored in the RAM 412 is a jackpot. It is acquired as success / failure information used in the lottery and is stored in one of the first reservation area REB1 to the fourth reservation area REB4 of the second reservation storage area REB. The acquisition processing of the success / failure information is executed by the MPU 41 functioning as the determination unit of the present invention by executing processing according to the control program. A lottery counter 412a (a big hit random number counter C1, a big hit type counter C2, a reach random number counter C3, a variable type counter CS1, etc.) is individually provided for each of the first reserved storage area REA and the second reserved storage area REB. May be provided.

  As described above, in the gaming machine 10, in addition to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3, the variation type counter CS1 includes the first hold area REA1 to the fourth hold area of the first hold storage area REA. It is stored in one of the first reservation area REB1 to the fourth reservation area REB4 of the REA4 and the second reservation storage area REB.

  Therefore, the big hit lottery for the variable game executed based on the success / failure information stored in the first reserved area REB1 to the fourth reserved area REB4 of the first reserved area REA1 to the fourth reserved area REA4 and the second reserved storage area REB In addition to the lottery result, the variation pattern (variation display time) of the symbol variation display displayed on the symbol display unit 341 can be determined in advance.

  Specifically, when a game ball enters the first winning opening 314, the success / failure information is vacant in the priority order of the first reservation area REA1, the second reservation area REA2, the third reservation area REA3, and the fourth reservation area REA4. It is stored in the area. In the number-of-holds storage area NAA, the number in which the success / failure information is stored in the first to-hold areas REA1 to REA4 is stored as the number-of-holds N.

  In addition, when a game ball enters the second winning opening 315, the success / failure information is vacant in the priority order of the first reservation area REB1, the second reservation area REB2, the third reservation area REB3, and the fourth reservation area REB4. Stored in the area. In the reserved number storage area NAB, the number of pieces of information that are stored in the first reserved area REB1 to the fourth reserved area REB4 is stored as the reserved number M.

  In other words, in the gaming machine 10, the first winning slot 314 is provided by a total of eight storage areas corresponding to the maximum number of reservations in the first reservation area REA1 to the fourth reservation area REA4 and the first reservation area REB1 to the fourth reservation area REB4. In addition, it is possible to hold up to four pieces of success / failure information as the winning history to the second winning opening 315.

  In addition, it is conceivable as another embodiment that a holding area having a maximum holding number of 8 is provided in common with the first winning opening 314 and the second winning opening 315, and even in this case, up to a maximum of eight holds. It is possible to hold the success / failure information as the winning history. The storing process of the success / failure information is executed by the MPU 41 by executing a process according to the control program.

  The execution area AE is the first reserved area REA1 of the first reserved storage area REA or the first reserved area REB1 of the second reserved storage area REB when the symbol variation display on the main display unit 37 and the symbol display unit 341 is started. This is a storage area used for moving the validity information stored in the. Specifically, the success / failure information of the first reservation area REB1 of the second reservation storage area REB is preferentially moved to the execution area AE, and there is no success / failure information in the first reservation area REB1 of the second reservation storage area REB. When the number-of-holds storage area NAB is 0, the success / failure information of the first reservation area REA1 of the first reservation storage area REA is moved to the execution area AE.

  It should be noted that the difference between the hold number M stored in the hold number storage area NAA of the first hold storage area REA and the hold number N stored in the hold number storage area NAB of the second hold storage area REB is 2 or more. In such a case, it may be considered as another embodiment that the value of the holding area having the larger number is preferentially moved to the execution area AE. In another embodiment, the success / failure information of the first reserved area REA1 of the first reserved storage area REA and the first reserved area REB1 of the second reserved storage area REB are alternately moved to the execution area AE.

  Then, at the start of one variable game, the MPU 41 performs a jackpot lottery based on the numerical information stored as the success / failure information in the execution area AE. At this time, when the first reservation area REA1 of the first reservation storage area REA is moved to the execution area AE, the success / failure information stored in the second reservation area REA2 is shifted to the first reservation area REA1, and the third The success / failure information stored in the reservation area REA3 is shifted to the second reservation area REA2, and the success / failure information stored in the fourth reservation area REA4 is shifted to the third reservation area REA3.

  Similarly, when the first reserved area REB1 of the second reserved storage area REB is moved to the execution area AE, the success / failure information stored in the second reserved area REB2 is shifted to the first reserved area REB1, and the third reserved The success / failure information stored in the area REB3 is shifted to the second reservation area REB2, and the success / failure information stored in the fourth reservation area REB4 is shifted to the third reservation area REB3.

  The jackpot random number counter C1 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 637, for example, and returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Particularly, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CIN1 at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CIN1 is a loop counter that is updated within the same range (0 to 738) as the big hit random number counter C1. The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated and stored in the holding storage area 412b at the timing when the game ball wins the first winning slot 314 or the second winning slot 315.

  Two types of random number values for winning the jackpot are set corresponding to the low probability mode and the high probability mode which is the probability variation gaming state, according to the success / failure table stored in the success / failure table storage area in the ROM 411. Here, FIG. 8A is a diagram showing an example of a low probability mode success / failure table corresponding to the low probability mode, and FIG. 8B is an example of a high probability mode success / failure table corresponding to the high probability mode.

  In the example shown in FIG. 8 (A) and FIG. 8 (B), as the low probability mode success / failure table and the high probability mode success / failure table, the probability that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery will be a jackpot (the jackpot probability) is the game set value. A plurality of different success / failure tables are provided accordingly. The low probability mode success / failure table and the high probability mode success / failure table include six success / failure tables corresponding to the six game setting values 1 to 6, respectively. In the order of the game setting value 6, the game setting value 5, the game setting value 3, the game setting value 2 and the game setting value 1, the jackpot probability that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot is high, which is advantageous to the player.

  In the game setting value 1, out of 65536 random values from 0 to 65535, the number of random values that result in the big win lottery result is 206 (0 to 205) for the low probability mode success / failure table. There are 821 (0 to 820) probabilistic mode success / failure tables. That is, in the game setting value 1, the jackpot probability in the low probability mode is about 1 / 318.1 (206/65536), and the jackpot probability in the high probability mode is about 4 times that in the low probability mode. 9 (820/65536).

  In the game setting value 2, out of 65536 random values from 0 to 65535, the number of random values that result in the big win lottery result is 212 (0 to 211) for the low probability mode success / failure table. There are 845 (0 to 844) probability mode success / failure tables. That is, in the game setting value 2, the jackpot probability in the low probability mode is approximately 1 / 309.1 (212/65536), and the jackpot probability in the high probability mode is approximately 4 times that in the low probability mode. 6 (845/65536).

  In the game setting value 3, out of 65536 random values from 0 to 65535, the number of random values that result in the big win lottery results is 218 (0 to 217) for the low probability mode success / failure table. There are 869 (0-868) probability mode success / failure tables. That is, in the game setting value 3, the jackpot probability in the low probability mode is about 1 / 300.6 (218/65536), and the jackpot probability in the high probability mode is about 4 times that in the low probability mode. 4 (869/65536).

  In the game setting value 4, out of 65536 random values from 0 to 65535, the number of random values that result in a big win lottery result is 224 (0 to 223) for the low probability mode success / failure table. There are 893 (0 to 892) probability mode success / failure tables. That is, in the game setting value 4, the jackpot probability in the low probability mode is approximately 1 / 292.6 (224/65536), and the jackpot probability in the high probability mode is approximately 4 times that in the low probability mode. 4 (893/65536).

  In the game setting value 5, out of 65536 random values from 0 to 65535, the number of random values that result in the big win lottery result is 230 (0 to 229) for the low probability mode success / failure table. There are 917 (0-916) probabilistic mode success / failure tables. That is, in the game setting value 5, the jackpot probability in the low probability mode is about 1 / 284.9 (230/65536), and the jackpot probability in the high probability mode is about 4 times that in the low probability mode. 5 (917/65536).

  In the game setting value 6, out of 65536 random values from 0 to 65535, the number of random values that result in the big win lottery result is 236 (0 to 235), high for the low probability mode success / failure table. The number of probability mode success / failure tables is 941 (0 to 940). That is, in the game setting value 6, the jackpot probability in the low probability mode is approximately 1 / 277.7 (236/65536), and the jackpot probability in the high probability mode is approximately 4 times that in the low probability mode. 6 (941/65536).

  Note that if the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is other than the random number value for winning the jackpot, the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is lost.

  Here, in the low-probability mode success / failure table and the high-probability mode success / failure table, the same lottery results in the jackpot lottery between the same game setting values are common, but it is also possible that the random numbers that are jackpots are not common It is done. Further, the random numbers for winning the jackpot may not be continuous values but may be partially or entirely discrete values.

  Moreover, although six low probability mode success / failure tables and six high probability mode success / failure tables are provided according to the six game setting values, it is sufficient that at least one success / failure table for each mode is provided. That is, the game setting value is not limited to six levels. It is also conceivable to provide one low probability mode success / failure table while providing a plurality of low probability mode success / failure tables corresponding to a plurality of stages of game setting values. That is, it is conceivable that a plurality of stages of game setting values are provided for the low probability mode, and no stepwise game setting values are provided for the high probability mode, so that the jackpot probability is uniform. Of course, the jackpot probability in the low probability mode may be made uniform, and a plurality of game setting values may be provided for the high probability mode.

  The jackpot type counter C2 is incremented one by one within the range of 0 to 19, and returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated and stored in the holding storage area 412b at the timing when the game ball wins the first winning slot 314 or the second winning slot 315. In the gaming machine 10, the value of the jackpot type counter C <b> 2 corresponding to each of the two types of jackpot types of probability variation jackpot and normal jackpot is set by the sorting table stored in the sorting table storage area in the ROM 411.

  Here, FIG. 8C is a diagram illustrating an example of a distribution table. In the example shown in FIG. 8C, when the type of the variable game is the first special symbol game triggered by winning the first winning port 314, the number of random numbers that are 5R probability variable jackpots is 0-9. The number of random numbers that are 16R probability variation jackpots is 5 from 10 to 14, and the number of random numbers that are normally 5R jackpots is 5 from 15 to 19. On the other hand, when the type of the variable game is the second special symbol game triggered by winning the second prize opening 315, the number of random numbers that become 5R probability variation jackpots is five from 0 to 4, and 16R probability variation jackpots. The number of the fourth random number is 10 from 5 to 14, and the number of random numbers that are normally 5R big hits is 5 from 15 to 19. That is, the gaming machine 10 is a so-called loop probability changing machine in which the probability of the probability variation big hit in the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game is the same. In the gaming machine 10, the probability of 16R probability variation jackpot in the second special symbol game is set higher than that in the first special symbol. That is, in the probabilistic gaming state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode described later), compared to the short time gaming state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode) and the normal gaming state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode described later). Thus, the expected value of game balls to be acquired when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot is set high.

  In the present embodiment, individual swings are provided for each of the first winning port 314 that triggers the execution of the first special symbol game by winning and the second winning port 315 that triggers the execution of the second special symbol game by winning. There is a minute table, and the distribution probability of the jackpot type differs depending on whether the game ball has won the first winning slot 314 or the second winning slot 315, but the first special symbol game and the second special symbol It is conceivable that the distribution probability of the jackpot type is the same for the game. In addition, the gaming machine 10 is not limited to the loop probability changing machine, but may be configured as a so-called ST machine, V-ST machine, a kind-two-mixer, or the like.

  Based on the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE, the MPU 41 determines that the lottery results in the jackpot lottery are “5R probability variable jackpot”, “16R probability variation jackpot”, “5R normal hit” It is determined whether it is “big hit” or “off”.

  Here, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is 5R probability variable jackpot or 5R normal jackpot, the opening / closing execution mode is executed in which the round game in which the variable winning opening 316 is opened in the jackpot game is repeated five times. Further, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is 16R probability variable jackpot, an opening / closing execution mode in which the round game is repeated 16 times in the jackpot game is executed.

  In the case of 5R probability variation jackpot or 16R probability variation jackpot, after the jackpot game is over, a transition is made to a probability variation gaming state that is a high probability mode with a high probability of winning the jackpot and a high frequency support mode with a high probability of opening the electric accessory 315b. In the present embodiment, the probability variation gaming state continues until the MPU 41 determines that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is “5R probability variation jackpot”, “16R probability variation jackpot”, or “5R normal jackpot”.

  On the other hand, in the case of the 5R normal jackpot, after the jackpot game is over, the game shifts to the short-time gaming state in the low-probability mode where the winning probability of the jackpot is low and the high-frequency support mode where the probability of opening the electric accessory 315b is high. In the present embodiment, the short-time gaming state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode) notifies the player of the lottery result in a jackpot lottery of a predetermined number of times set in advance, such as 50 times and 100 times. Or when the player determines that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot before the specified number of times has elapsed. In addition, when the player is notified of the lottery result in the specified number of lottery lotteries in the high frequency support mode, the high frequency support mode is shifted to the low frequency support mode in which the probability of opening the electric accessory 315b is low. That is, when the notification of the lottery result for a predetermined number of times is completed in the short-time gaming state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode), the normal gaming state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode) is entered.

  By the way, when the gaming machine 10 is configured as an ST machine or a V-ST machine instead of a loop probability change machine, a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times, 100 times) set in advance after the jackpot game at the time of the probability change big hit is completed. If the jackpot lottery is executed in the probabilistic gaming state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode) and the lottery result in the jackpot lottery does not become a big hit before the specified number of times has passed, the short-time gaming state (low probability mode and high frequency) The mode is shifted to the normal gaming state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode) without shifting to the support mode), and the high frequency support mode ends. In addition, it is also conceivable as another embodiment to perform a falling lottery from a probability variation game state to a short-time game state or a normal game state in a variable game. If the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is out of play, the game is not shifted to the jackpot gaming state or the short-time gaming state. In this embodiment, the case where the gaming machine 10 has three types of jackpot types of 5R probability variation jackpot, 16R probability variation jackpot, and 5R normal jackpot will be described as an example. It is also conceivable to have other jackpot types such as round regular jackpot, 16R regular jackpot.

  Further, the reach random number counter C3 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 238, for example, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated and stored in the holding storage area 412b at the timing when the game ball wins the first winning slot 314 or the second winning slot 315.

  In the gaming machine 10, the type of the variable display stop result displayed on the symbol display unit 341 is selected by the reach random number counter C3 when the lottery result in the big hit lottery is out of place. Specifically, the outage type table stored in the outage type table storage area in the ROM 411 causes a back-and-forth outreach, in which the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol after a reach occurs, and the reach is also generated. Then, the value of the reach random number counter C3 is set for each of the three types of outliers, ie, reach other than before and after detachment where the final stop symbol is other than before and after the reach symbol, and complete detachment where no reach occurs.

  Here, FIG. 8D is a diagram illustrating an example of the detachment type table. In the example shown in FIG. 8D, the random number value that becomes the front / rear out of reach is 0 to 8, the random number value that reaches the other than the front / rear out is 9 to 38, and the random number value that is completely out of the range is 39. ~ 238. It should be noted that the MPU 41 determines that a reach has occurred regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in a variable game that wins a 5R probability variable jackpot, a 16R probability variable jackpot, or a 5R normal jackpot, that is, a variable game that shifts to the open / close execution mode.

  Here, “reach” indicates a state in which a symbol combination of a decorative symbol indicating that the jackpot has been won is likely to become a symbol combination after the symbol display on the symbol display unit 341 is started until the symbol is stopped. It is a fluctuating state. In one example, the same symbol is stopped and displayed at two stop positions among the three stop positions on the active line in the symbol display unit 341, and the display symbols corresponding to the remaining one stop position are in a state of fluctuating. In addition, during the reach fluctuation state in the symbol display unit 341, a game in which a moving image of a predetermined character or the like is displayed and suggests an expectation level, or a player's operation on the operation button 20 is reflected in the effect. Person-participation-type operation effect processing and the like are executed. In addition, during execution of these effect processes, it is also conceivable that the variable display on the symbol display unit 341 is not displayed, or the display is reduced or enlarged.

  The electric accessory release counter C4 is incremented, for example, one by one within a range of 0 to 250, and returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory release counter C4 is periodically updated and stored in the electric combination reservation area 412c in the RAM 412 at the timing when a game ball wins the through gate 317. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to open the electric accessory 315b for a predetermined time based on the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 stored in the electric utility reservation area 412c. For example, it is conceivable that the winning combination is made when the electric accessory release counter C4 is 0 to 199, and the winning combination is made when the electric accessory release counter C4 is 200 to 250.

  The variation type counter CS1 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 199, for example, and returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 determines the variation pattern type (variation display time) of the symbol variation display displayed on the symbol display unit 341 in accordance with the lottery result in the jackpot lottery. In this way, by determining the variation pattern type, the sound lamp control device 5 performs rough variation game effects such as high-speed variation effects (basic effects, non-reach effects), normal reach effects, super reach effects, and special reach effects. The type is determined according to the variation pattern type (variation display time). The variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time a main process, which will be described later, is executed once by the MPU 41, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. Further, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the hold storage area 412b at the timing when the game ball wins the first winning port 314 or the second winning port 315.

  Then, the MPU 41 determines a variation pattern indicating the variation display time based on the variation type counter CS1 and a preset variation table. Specifically, the MPU 41 identifies the type of variation pattern while referring to a normal jackpot variation table, a probability variation jackpot variation table, or a deviation variation table stored in advance in the variation table storage area of the ROM 411. Note that these variation tables may be individually provided for each of the low probability mode and the high probability mode. Further, the probability variation jackpot variation table may be provided individually for each of the 5R probability variation jackpot and the 16R probability variation jackpot.

  Here, FIG. 9A, FIG. 9B, and FIG. 9C are diagrams showing examples of a normal jackpot variation table, a probability variation jackpot variation table, and a deviation variation table. As shown in FIG. 9A, FIG. 9B, and FIG. 9C, in the normal jackpot variation table, the probability variation jackpot variation table, and the outlier variation table, the variation pattern is previously set according to the value of the variation type counter CS1. It is associated. Then, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is “5R normal jackpot”, the MPU 41 is a normal jackpot variation table, and when the lottery result is “5R probability variation jackpot” or “16R probability variation jackpot”, the probability variation jackpot variation table, lottery When the result is “out”, the type of variation pattern is specified by referring to the out variation table.

  More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 9A and 9B, in the normal jackpot variation table and the probability variation jackpot variation table, the variation pattern is selected according to the value of the variation type counter CS1. Here, when the variation pattern “01” is selected, the audio lamp control device 5 determines a normal reach production pattern with a variation display time of 30 s as the variation type (production pattern type), and the symbol display unit 341 displays the normal reach production pattern. Is executed. The normal reach effect pattern is an effect pattern in which the final individual variable game effect type in the variable game effect is the normal reach effect. When the variation pattern “02” is selected, the audio lamp control device 5 determines a super reach production pattern having a variation display time of 60 s as the variation type (production pattern type), and the symbol display unit 341 performs the super reach production. The pattern is executed. The super reach effect pattern is an effect pattern in which the final individual variable game effect type in the variable game effect is the super reach effect. Further, when the variation pattern “03” is selected, the voice lamp control device 5 determines the special reach effect pattern having the longest change display time of 90 s as the variation type (effect pattern), and the symbol display unit 341 displays the special reach. A production pattern is executed. The special reach effect pattern is an effect pattern in which the final individual variable game effect type in the variable game effect is the special reach effect.

  As shown in FIG. 9C, in the deviation variation table, the variation type counter CS1 for each stop type (rear / rear out reach, reach other than front / rear out, complete out) determined by the value of the reach random number counter C3. Correspondence relations with fluctuation patterns are defined. More specifically, when the stop type at the time of detachment is reach back and forth out of reach or reach other than back and forth out, one of the variation patterns “01” to “03” is selected according to the value of the variation type counter CS1. The On the other hand, when the stop type at the time of departure is completely out of the range, either the variation pattern “04” or “05” is selected according to the value of the variation type counter CS1. When the variation pattern “04” is selected, the voice lamp control device 5 determines a reachless effect pattern (non-reach effect pattern) having a variation display time of 7 s as the variation type (effect pattern type), and displays the symbol. In unit 341, a non-reach effect pattern is executed. When the variation pattern “05” is selected, the sound lamp control device 5 determines a reach-less effect pattern (non-reach effect pattern) with a change display time of 10 s as the change type (effect pattern type), and displays the symbol. In unit 341, a non-reach effect pattern is executed.

  For example, in the gaming machine 10, as a variation display at the time of departure corresponding to the variation pattern “04”, the variation display of the variation pattern in which the variation display deviates without a notice effect such as a character or a message being displayed is stopped. Is executed. Further, in the gaming machine 10, as the fluctuation display at the time of deviation corresponding to the fluctuation pattern “05”, the fluctuation display of the deviation pattern which stops with the symbol is displayed with a notice effect such as a character, a message or the like being displayed. Executed. In addition, in the case of the fluctuation display at the time of deviation corresponding to the fluctuation pattern “05”, a player participation type operation effect reflecting the operation of the operation button 20 by the player may be executed as a notice effect.

  Note that the type of variation pattern is not limited to the examples shown in FIGS. 9A, 9B, and 9C. Further, the probability variation jackpot variation table may be provided individually for each of the 5R probability variation jackpot and the 16R probability variation jackpot.

  For example, in the gaming machine 10, a plurality of types of normal reach effects with different characters, stories, etc. are prepared as normal reach effects executed in the normal reach effect pattern corresponding to the variation pattern “01”. The normal reach production is performed.

  Similarly, in the gaming machine 10, a plurality of types of super reach production with different characters, stories, etc. are prepared as super reach production executed in the super reach production pattern corresponding to the variation pattern “02”. One of the super-reach productions is performed. Super reach production is a reach production with a longer variation time than normal reach production, the probability of winning a lottery in the jackpot lottery is higher than the normal reach production (expected degree), and wins a big hit than the special reach production Executed when suggesting to the player that the probability (expectation) is low.

  Furthermore, in the gaming machine 10, a plurality of types of special reach effects with different characters and stories are prepared as special reach effects to be executed in the special reach effect pattern corresponding to the variation pattern “03”. One of the special reach productions performed is executed. The special reach effect is a reach effect that has a longer variation time than the normal reach effect, for example, an effect that develops from a normal reach effect or a super reach effect. The special reach production is executed when the player is suggested to have a higher probability (expectation) of winning the jackpot than the normal reach production or the special reach production.

  In addition, in the production pattern corresponding to the variation pattern, an operation production in which the operation state on the operation button 20 by the player is reflected in the production, for example, a single operation production in which a single operation is reflected in the production, or the operation button 20 by the player. The player participation type operation effects such as a continuous hit operation effect in which the continuous hit operation is reflected in the effect and a long press operation effect in which the long press operation of the operation button 20 by the player is reflected in the effect may be included.

  When the MPU 41 identifies the variation pattern indicating the variation display time by the 7-segment display units 372 and 373 and the symbol display unit 341 of the main display unit 37, the variation pattern command indicating the variation pattern and the lottery result in the big hit lottery is given. Input to the sound lamp controller 5. Specifically, when the lottery result is “5R normal jackpot”, the MPU 41 precedes the fluctuation patterns “01” to “03” with a change pattern command “A” indicating “5R normal jackpot”. Any one of “A01” to “A03” is output. In addition, when the lottery result is “5R probability variation jackpot”, the MPU 41 precedes the variation patterns “01” to “03” with a variation pattern command “B01” with “B” indicating that it is a 5R probability variation jackpot. Any one of “B03” is output. Further, when the lottery result is “16R probability variation jackpot”, the MPU 41 precedes the variation patterns “01” to “03” with a variation pattern command “C01” with “C” indicating that it is a 16R probability variation jackpot. Any one of “C03” is output. In addition, when the lottery result is “out”, the MPU 41 adds fluctuation pattern commands “D01” to “D05” with “D” indicating that it is out of front of the fluctuation patterns “01” to “05”. One of the following is output. Thereby, the voice lamp control device 5 can determine the variation pattern (variation display time) and the lottery result based on the variation pattern command, and the symbol display unit 341 based on the variation pattern and the lottery result. The details of the variation mode such as the variation type and the effect type displayed in the above are determined. Then, the sound lamp control device 5 causes the symbol display unit 341 to perform a variable display based on the details of the determined variation mode, reproduces a sound in accordance with the variable display from the speaker 26, and turns on and blinks the illumination unit 27. Or turn it off.

  As described above, in the gaming machine 10, the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 performs a simple process for determining the variation pattern (variation display time) based on the variation type counter CS1 and the variation table for the variation display in the symbol display unit 341. Will be executed. Therefore, even if the MPU 41 of the gaming machine 10 is configured by an 8-bit microcomputer, the MPU 41 can stably perform the big hit lottery. In addition, since the details of the variation mode that is actually displayed on the symbol display unit 341 are determined by the sound lamp control device 5, a variety of variation modes can be selectively executed as the variation mode.

  Here, FIG. 10 is a block diagram showing an example of the game information storage area 412d set in the RAM 412 in the MPU 41 of the main controller 4 of the gaming machine shown in FIG. In the game information storage area 412d, game information related to game history, play performance, and the like are stored. In the present embodiment, the game information storage area 412d includes, as game information, “out ball number”, “general winning port payout ball number”, “first winning port payout ball number”, “second winning port payout ball number”. ”,“ Variable winning award payout balls ”,“ game setting value ”,“ base information ”,“ continuous character ratio information ”,“ characteristic ratio information ”,“ cumulative jackpot lottery count ”,“ unit jackpot lottery count ” , “Number of big hits”, and “number of consecutive misses” are stored. Among these pieces of game information, “game setting value”, “base information”, “continuous feature ratio information”, “composition ratio information”, and “unit big hit number of lotteries” are game information (performance information) )

  The “number of out balls” is an integrated value of the number of game balls fired on the game board 31 in a normal game state (a state with a low probability mode and not a high frequency support mode). The “number of out balls” is stored as a value obtained by counting the number of out balls detected by the out ball sensor 35 in the sensor detection process of step S1001 in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. 14 described later.

  The “general winning opening payout ball number” is an integrated value of game balls to be paid out for winning in the general winning opening 313 in a normal gaming state (a state with a low probability mode but not a high frequency support mode). This “general winning opening payout ball number” is the setting of the winning ball command in step S1303 in the main process of FIG. 17 described later when the winning sensor 313a detects a winning in the general winning slot 313 in the normal gaming state. When setting a winning ball command for causing the payout control device 7 to pay out the number of winning balls corresponding to winning in the general winning opening 313 in the processing, the value is updated to the value obtained by adding the number of paying balls due to the current winning. .

  The “number of first winning mouth payout balls” is an integrated value of game balls to be paid out for winning in the first winning mouth 314 in a normal gaming state (a state that is in a low probability mode but not a high frequency support mode). . This “first winning opening payout ball number” is the winning ball in step S1303 in the main process of FIG. 17 described later when the winning sensor 314a detects winning in the first winning opening 314 in the normal gaming state. A value obtained by adding the number of balls to be paid out at the current winning when setting a winning ball command for causing the payout control device 7 to pay out the number of winning balls corresponding to winning in the first winning port 314 in the command setting process Update to

  The “number of payout balls for the second winning opening” is an integrated value of game balls to be paid out for winning in the second winning opening 315 in the short-time gaming state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode). . This “second winning opening payout ball number” is the winning ball in step S1303 in the main process of FIG. 17 described later when the winning sensor 315a detects winning in the second winning opening 315 in the short-time gaming state. A value obtained by adding the number of balls to be paid out in this winning when setting a winning ball command for causing the payout control device 7 to pay out the number of winning balls corresponding to winning in the second winning opening 315 in the command setting process Update to

  The “variable winning opening payout ball number” is an integrated value of game balls to be paid out for winning in the variable winning opening 316 in the jackpot gaming state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode). This “variable winning opening payout ball number” is set in the winning ball command setting in step S1303 in the main process of FIG. 17 described later when a winning to the variable winning opening 316 is detected by the ball receiving sensor 316a in the big hit gaming state. When setting a prize ball command for causing the payout control device 7 to pay out the number of winning balls corresponding to winning in the variable winning opening 316 in the process, the value is updated to the value obtained by adding the number of balls to be paid out at this time winning. .

  Note that the “out-of-balls”, “general prize-out / out-of-balls”, “first prize-out / out-of-balls”, “second prize-out / out-of-balls”, and “variable prize-out / out-of-balls” are described later. In the specific performance information update process of No. 22, when the “out ball count” reaches 60000 balls (step S1806: Yes), it is cleared to 0 balls (step S1810).

  The “game setting value” is used to select a low-probability mode success / failure table (see FIG. 8A) and a high-probability mode success / failure table (see FIG. 8B) used in the big hit lottery (win / no decision). . In other words, the “game setting value” defines the jackpot probability in the low probability mode and the high probability mode. In the present embodiment, as will be described later, four stages of game setting values (four types of low probability mode success / failure tables (see FIG. 8A) with different jackpot probabilities) and high probability mode success / failure table (see FIG. 8B) ) Has been prepared. The “game setting value” is updated in a game setting value changing process of FIG.

  The “base information” is information related to “base”, which is a payout rate (a payout rate) in the normal gaming state (the state that is in the low probability mode but not the high frequency support mode), and this “base” is the normal gaming state Is the ratio of the total number of payout balls of “general payout number of payout balls” and “first payout number of payout balls” with respect to the “number of out balls” in FIG. When “base” is expressed by a mathematical expression, “base” = 100 × (“number of payouts for general winning mouth” + “number of payouts for first winning mouth”) / “number of out balls”. The “base information” includes information on the current base BL, the previous 60,000 ball base B1, and the previous 60,000 ball base B2. Here, the previous 60,000 ball base B1 and the previous 60,000 ball base B2 are updated every time the number of out balls reaches 60000 balls in the specific performance information update process of FIG. 22 described later (steps S1807 and S1808). Specifically, the “base” when the latest number of out balls reaches 60000 balls is the previous 60,000 ball base B1, and the “base” when the previous number of out balls reaches 60000 balls is Each time as the 60,000 coin base B2, the game information storage area of the RAM 412 is stored as “base information”. Further, the current base BL is calculated until the counter value of the number of out balls reaches 60000 balls (step S1803), and the current base BL is stored as “base information” in the game information storage area of the RAM 412.

  In the present embodiment, the “base information” includes “current base BL”, “previous 60,000 base B1” and “previous 60,000 base B2”, and the past 60,000 bases are recorded as history. However, you may make it leave the past 60,000 or more bases as a history. Further, the “base information” may include a cumulative base from when the gaming machine 10 is installed in the gaming hall to the present.

  “Consecutive character ratio information” indicates the total number of balls to be paid out by winning a prize to all winning holes (general winning holes 313, first winning holes 314, second winning holes 315, and variable winning holes 316) for which prize balls are paid out. The information regarding the “continuous character ratio”, which is the ratio occupied by the number of payouts for the variable winning opening. When the “continuous character ratio” is expressed by a mathematical expression, “continuous character ratio” = 100 × “variable winning award payout ball number” / “total payout ball number”. “Continuous character ratio information” is updated, for example, in the specific performance information update process of FIG. 22 described later. In the present embodiment, the “continuous character ratio information” is stored as a cumulative continuous character ratio from when the gaming machine 10 is installed in the game hall to the present. “Consecutive character ratio information” is for a certain period (for example, a certain number of jackpots (for example, 100 times), a period until a certain number of jackpot lotteries (for example, 1000 times) is executed in the normal gaming state. , The ratio of the continuous combination with respect to a certain number of out balls (for example, a period until reaching 60,000 balls). Of course, the “continuous character ratio information” may include both the cumulative continuous character ratio and the continuous character ratio in a certain period.

  “Composition ratio information” is the total number of balls to be paid out by winning a prize to all winning holes (general winning holes 313, first winning holes 314, second winning holes 315, and variable winning holes 316) for which prize balls are paid out. This is information relating to “object ratio”, which is the ratio of the total number of payout balls to the number of payout balls at the second prize port and the number of payout balls at the variable prize port. Expressing the “role ratio” as a mathematical expression, it is “ratio of bonuses” = 100 × (“number of payouts for second winning mouth” + “number of payouts for variable winning mouth”) / “total number of payouts”. “Composition item ratio information” is updated, for example, in the specific performance information update process of FIG. 22 described later. In the present embodiment, the “community ratio information” is stored as an accumulated ratio of up to the present time after the gaming machine 10 is installed in the game hall. Note that the “composition ratio information” is for a certain period (for example, a certain number of jackpots (for example, 100 times), a period until a certain number of jackpot lotteries (for example, 1000 times) is executed in the normal gaming state, It may be a ratio of an accessory to a certain number of out balls (for example, a period until reaching 60,000 balls). Of course, the “continuous character ratio information” may include both the cumulative character ratio and the character ratio in a certain period.

  The “cumulative jackpot lottery count” refers to a normal gaming state (a state that is a low-probability mode and not a high-frequency support mode) from the start of the gaming machine 10 to the present time before the game hall starts business. It is the number of times that the jackpot lottery was performed. In other words, the “cumulative jackpot lottery count” is also the cumulative variation display count in which the symbol variation display of the 7-segment display 372 of the main display unit 37 is executed in response to winning in the first winning opening 314 in the normal gaming state. is there. The “cumulative jackpot lottery count” is incremented by one each time the symbol variation display of the main display unit 37 is started in step S1606 in the variation start processing of FIG. Further, the “cumulative lottery number of lotteries” is cleared from the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 when the main power supply of the gaming machine 10 is turned off.

  “Number of lottery per unit jackpot” is a lottery lottery triggered by winning a prize to the first winning port 314 for a certain number of negative difference balls in the normal gaming state (low probability mode but not high frequency support mode). This is the number of times received (the number of times that the symbol variation display of the 7-segment display 372 of the main display unit 37 has been executed). In this embodiment, the fixed number is “250 balls”, and the difference ball is the number of balls obtained by subtracting “the number of balls for paying out a general winning opening” and “the number of balls for paying out a first winning mouth” from “the number of out balls”. In other words, the “number of lottery per unit lottery” is the number of symbol variations displayed on the 7-segment indicator 372 (the number of lottery lottery wins) on an average of 1000 yen when receiving 250 balls for 1000 yen in a game hall. is there. The “unit jackpot lottery count” may be the number of times that a jackpot lottery is received per a certain number of “out balls” in the normal gaming state. The “unit big hit number of lotteries” is updated in step S1805 in the specific performance information update process of FIG. 22 described later. In the present embodiment, the “unit jackpot lottery count” is stored as the cumulative unit jackpot lottery count from when the gaming machine 10 is installed in the game hall to the present. The “unit jackpot lottery count” refers to a certain period (for example, a certain number of jackpot numbers (for example, 100 times), a period until a certain number of jackpot lotteries (for example, 1000 times) is executed in the normal gaming state, The number of out balls may be for a certain number (for example, a period until reaching 60,000 balls). Of course, as the “unit jackpot lottery count”, both the cumulative unit jackpot lottery count and the unit jackpot lottery count for a certain period may be stored as game information.

  “Number of jackpots” is the number of times that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery performed from the start of the gaming machine 10 to the present before the game hall starts operating is a jackpot. The “hit number” is incremented by 1 each time the gaming state is shifted to the jackpot gaming state in the gaming state transition process executed in step S1306 in the main process of FIG. Further, the “number of jackpots” is cleared from the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 when the main power of the gaming machine 10 is turned off.

  “Number of consecutive misses” is the number of times that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is continuously missed in the normal gaming state (in the low probability mode but not in the high frequency support mode), and the lottery result is a jackpot If cleared to 0 times. The “number of consecutive losing times” is the result of the go / no-go determination based on the low probability mode go / no-go table in step S1603 when the symbol change display of the main display unit 37 is started in step S1606 in the change start process of FIG. If it is off, 1 is added, and if the result of the determination is a big hit, it is cleared to 0. In the present embodiment, the “number of consecutive failures” is cleared from the game information storage area 412 d of the RAM 412 by turning off the main power supply of the gaming machine 10. Of course, the “number of consecutive failures” may not be cleared from the game information storage area 412d by turning off the main power supply of the gaming machine 10.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 6, the performance information display device 4A displays “base information” and “game setting value” stored as game information (performance information) in the game information storage area 412d set in the RAM 412. is there. The performance information display device 4A includes a performance display monitor 43, a performance display switch 44, a game set value display unit 45, a set value change operation unit 46, and a ROM 47. Here, FIG. 11 is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of the performance information display device 4A.

  As shown in FIG. 11, the performance display monitor 43 displays “base information” in the gaming machine 10, and is provided at a position where the inner frame 12 is visible (FIG. 3). reference). The performance display monitor 43 includes a plurality (four in this embodiment) of 7-segment displays 431 to 434, and is referred to as a 4-digit 7-segment. The performance display monitor 43 is preferably provided in the main control device 4, but may be provided in a device other than the main control device 4 in the main control unit 331, and other components of the game other than the main control unit 331. May be provided. It is also conceivable to display “base information” using the two 7-segment displays 372 and 373 of the main display unit 37.

  The 7-segment indicators 431 to 434 can display numbers “0” to “9” and alphabets “A” to “F”. In the 7-segment indicators 431 to 434, when the alphabet “B” is displayed, the dot is lit to display “8.” to distinguish it from the number “8”, and the alphabet “D” is displayed. In order to distinguish from the number “0”, the dot is lit and displayed as “0.”. In addition, when displaying any of the alphabets “A” to “F”, it is also conceivable to light a dot to clearly indicate that it is an alphabet.

  The performance display monitor 43 is an identification segment in which the left two 7-segment indicators 431 and 432 of the four 7-segment indicators 431 to 434 display “base type” as an abbreviated symbol, and the right seven segments The display units 433 and 434 are ratio segments that display the base value (%) calculated by the MPU 41. For example, when the current base BL is 31%, the abbreviation symbols “BL” of the current base BL are “8.”, “L” in the left two 7-segment indicators 431 and 432 that are identification segments. The base value “31” is displayed as “3” and “1” on the two right 7-segment indicators 433 and 434 that are ratio segments. That is, on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434, “8.”, “L”, “3”, and “1” are displayed in order from the left.

  The performance display switch 44 is a switch for turning on / off the power of the performance display monitor 43 (four 7-segment displays 431 to 434) at a time by a pressing operation. Provided (see FIG. 3). In the illustrated example, the power supply is turned on when the upper half of the performance display switch 44 is pressed, and the power is turned off when the lower half is pressed. When an operation to turn on the power to the performance display switch 44 is performed, the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 are energized, and the base information can be displayed on the performance display monitor 43. On the other hand, when an operation to turn off the power is performed on the performance display switch 44, the energization to the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 is cut off, and the base information on the performance display monitor 43 is not displayed. . The performance display switch 44 may be provided in addition to the main controller 4.

  Here, FIG. 12A is a display example on the performance display monitor 43. As shown in FIG. 12A, when the performance display switch 44 is off, the base information is not displayed because the 7-segment indicators 431 to 434 are in the off state. As shown in FIGS. 12B to 12D, when the performance display switch 44 is turned on, the current base BL → the previous 60,000 is used as “base information” unless the performance display switch 44 is turned off. The base is looped in order of the ball base B1 → the previous 60,000 ball base B2 → the current base BL, and each base is repeatedly displayed at regular intervals. In the example shown in FIG. 12B, the current base BL is 28%, and in the example shown in FIG. 12C, the previous 60,000 ball base B1 is 34%, and FIG. In the example shown in the figure, the 60,000 ball base B2 is 32% before the last time. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 12A, when the performance display switch 44 is turned off, the 7-segment displays 431 to 434 are turned off, and the base information on the performance display monitor 43 is not displayed.

  It should be noted that a program necessary for displaying the “base information” on the performance display monitor 43, for example, a program for calculating the current base BL, the previous 60,000 ball base B1, and the previous 60,000 ball base B2; A program for sequentially displaying the BL, the previous 60,000 ball base B1 and the previous 60,000 ball base B2 at regular intervals is stored in a ROM 47 provided in the main controller 4 separately from the ROM 412 of the MPU 41. Thereby, the load on the ROM 411 of the MPU 41 can be reduced. However, if the ROM 411 of the MPU 41 has sufficient capacity, a program necessary for displaying “base information” on the performance display monitor 43 may be stored in the ROM 411. Further, a program necessary for displaying “base information” on the performance display monitor 43 may be stored in a storage means such as a ROM provided separately from the main controller 4.

  Further, in the performance display monitor 43, instead of “base information” or in addition to “base information”, it is stored in a game information storage area 412d such as “continuous character ratio information” and “character ratio information”. Other performance information may be displayed.

  Further, the performance display monitor 43 is not limited to a 7-segment display, and may be configured by other forms of display such as a dot matrix display, a liquid crystal display, or an organic EL display.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 11, the game set value display unit 45 selects a low probability mode success / failure table (see FIG. 8A) and a high probability mode success / failure table (see FIG. 8B) to be referred to in the big hit lottery. In order to display the above-mentioned game setting value, it is constituted by a 7-segment display. Note that the game set value display unit 45 is not limited to a 7-segment display, and may be configured by other types of displays such as a dot matrix display, a liquid crystal display, and an organic EL display, and uses the performance display monitor 43. The game setting value may be displayed.

  The set value change operation unit 46 switches on / off the power of the 7-segment display by a pressing operation, and allows the game set value to be changed by being rotated when the power of the 7-segment display is on. The set value change operation unit 46 has a function as a contact switch that is turned on and off by a pressing operation, for example, and a function as a rotary switch that switches a contact by a rotation operation (rotation of a predetermined angle). Here, FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a display example on the game setting value display unit 45 of the main control device.

  As shown in FIG. 13A, when the set value change operation unit 46 is pressed when the game set value display unit 45 is in the extinguished state, the game set value is obtained by energizing the 7-segment display. A number is displayed on the display unit 45. The numbers displayed at this time are the game setting values stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 and indicate the current game setting values. In the illustrated example, the game setting value is “1”. On the other hand, when the setting value changing operation unit 46 is pressed while the game setting value display unit 45 is in the lit state, the game setting value display unit 45 is turned off by cutting off power to the 7-segment display. It becomes a state.

  As shown in FIG. 13B, when the game setting value display unit 45 is in the lighting state, when the rotation operation is performed on the setting value change operation unit 46, the number displayed on the game setting value display unit 45 is changed. Is done. In the illustrated example, when the game setting value display unit 45 is rotated clockwise, the number displayed on the game setting value display unit 45 is increased, and when the game setting value display unit 45 is rotated counterclockwise, the game setting value display is displayed. The number displayed in the part 45 becomes smaller. When the number displayed on the game set value display unit 45 is changed by rotating the game set value display unit 45, the changed number is stored as a game set value in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. The Therefore, when the set value change operation unit 46 is pressed while the number corresponding to the target game set value is displayed on the game set value display unit 45 and the power of the 7-segment display is turned off, The number displayed immediately before being turned off is determined as the game setting value. As a result, the MPU 41 selects a low probability mode propriety table (see FIG. 8A) or a high probability mode propriety table (see FIG. 8B) selected according to the game setting value stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. A lottery lottery can be performed based on

  The method for changing the game set value is not limited to the method of turning off the game set value display unit 45 after rotating the set value change operation unit 46. For example, a method of determining a game setting value by pressing the operation button 20 (see FIG. 1) after rotating the setting value changing operation unit 46, or by repeatedly or long pressing the operation button 20 (see FIG. 1). A method of turning off the power of the game setting value display unit 45 after changing the number displayed on the game setting value display unit 45, by inserting a key into a key hole provided in the main control device 4 or the like and rotating the key A method of removing the key after changing the number displayed on the game setting value display unit 45 may be used.

[Sub-control unit 332]
As shown in FIG. 6, the sub-control unit 332 includes an audio lamp control device 5 and a display control device 6, and a symbol variation display and symbol display on the symbol display unit 341 based on a control signal input from the main control unit 331. The effect display is executed.

[Audio lamp control device 5]
The sound lamp control device 5 includes an MPU 51, an input / output I / F 52, and the like. The MPU 51 is an arithmetic unit configured as a one-chip microcomputer. The MPU 51 includes a ROM 511 and a RAM 512.

  The ROM 511 is a nonvolatile storage unit in which a control program and parameter information are stored in advance. In addition, the ROM 511 also stores information such as a sound used for a variable game effect, a jackpot game effect, and a lamp blinking pattern. The RAM 512 is a volatile storage unit that can read and write various types of information, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) for processing executed by the MPU 51. Note that the RAM 512 may be a nonvolatile storage unit.

  The voice lamp control device 5 executes a process according to the control program stored in the ROM 511 by the MPU 51, and thereby sends a command to the display control device 6 based on a command (control signal) input from the main control device 4. (Control signal) is input, and the display of the symbol display unit 341 is controlled. The sound lamp control device 5 also controls the playback sound output from the speaker 26 and the blinking mode of the electrical decoration unit 27 in accordance with the display of the symbol display unit 341. For example, the MPU 51 controls the image display on the symbol display unit 341, the playback sound output from the speaker 26, and the blinking mode of the electrical decoration unit 27 when executing a later-described variable game effect and jackpot game effect.

  The input / output I / F 52 is an input / output interface that inputs a signal to the sound lamp control device 5 and outputs a control signal from the sound lamp control device 5. Specifically, the main control device 4 and the display control device 6 are connected to the input / output I / F 52. From the main controller 4 to the sound lamp controller 5, the variation pattern command, first hold command, second hold command, shift command, jackpot start command, round game start command, ending start command, jackpot game end command, game Commands such as setting value change commands are entered. Further, the sound lamp control device 5 outputs a display variation pattern command or the like to the display control device 6. A configuration in which the display control device 6 receives a command from the main control device 4 and inputs the command to the sound lamp control device 5 is also conceivable as another embodiment. In addition, a configuration in which the sub control unit 332 includes one control device having both functions of the sound lamp control device 5 and the display control device 6 is also conceivable as another embodiment.

  The input / output I / F 52 is connected to a speaker 26 and an electrical decoration unit 27. In the sound lamp control device 5, the MPU 51 controls the sound output from the speaker 26, the blinking mode of the illumination unit 27, the 7 segment display unit 39, and the like based on the command input from the main control device 4. It is possible. When the 7-segment display unit 39 is controlled by the MPU 51, the segments A to G are individually turned on or off. Then, in the 7-segment display unit 39, the whole number corresponding to the game setting value is displayed in a specific color so that the game setting value is clearly indicated, and a part of the number corresponding to the game setting value is displayed in a specific color. This suggests a game setting value. An operation switch 20a is connected to the input / output I / F 52. And MPU51 judges the presence or absence of operation with respect to the operation button 20 based on the detection signal from the operation switch 20a. Note that the MPU 51 may individually determine that the operation on the operation button 20 has been started, the operation has been continued, and the operation has been completed, as well as whether or not the operation button 20 has been operated. Good. Thereby, it can be determined whether the operation with respect to the operation button 20 is a single stroke, a continuous stroke, or a long press operation. The input / output I / F 52 is connected to an upper selection operation switch 211a, a lower selection operation switch 211b, a left selection operation switch 211c, a right selection operation switch 211d, and a determination operation switch 21Ba. The MPU 51 then selects a plurality of selection buttons 21A (211 to 214) based on detection signals from the upper selection operation switch 211a, the lower selection operation switch 211b, the left selection operation switch 211c, the right selection operation switch 211d, and the determination operation switch 21Ba. ) And the determination button 21B. The operation switch 20a, the selection switches 211a to 211d, and the determination operation switch 21Ba may be connected to the input / output I / F 42 of the main control device 4.

  The MPU 51 executes predetermined arithmetic processing based on commands such as a variation pattern command, a first hold command, a second hold command, and a shift command input from the main control device 4 (see FIG. 29).

  Specifically, when the fluctuation pattern command is input, the MPU 51 changes the fluctuation pattern (decoration pattern combination of decorative symbols (see FIG. 30), fluctuation display time, fluctuation type (see FIG. 31)) based on the fluctuation pattern command. And the effect pattern type (see FIGS. 32 to 34) are determined, and a display variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern is transmitted to the display control device 6 (see step S2105 in the command determination process of FIG. 29). The symbol variation display on the display unit 341 is started. At this time, in the symbol display unit 341, when the variation pattern command indicates a deviation, the combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the deviation is stopped and displayed.

[Display control device 6]
The display control device 6 controls the display of the symbol display unit 341 based on a command (control signal) input from the sound lamp control device 5. Specifically, the display control device 6 executes the symbol variation display and the effect display by controlling the display of the symbol display unit 341 based on the display variation pattern command or the like input from the sound lamp control device 5, An event prediction image for allowing the user to select an expected event, a segment selection image for selecting the control target segments A to G in the 7-segment display unit 39, and the like are displayed.

  The display control device 6 includes an MPU 61, an input / output I / F 62, and the like, and the audio lamp control device 5 and the symbol display unit 341 are connected to the input / output I / F 62. The voice lamp control device 5 and the display control device 6 may be capable of bidirectional communication.

  The MPU 61 is an arithmetic unit configured as a one-chip microcomputer, and the MPU 61 incorporates a ROM 611 and a RAM 612. The display control device 6 also includes other circuits such as a timer circuit for measuring time and an interrupt circuit for accepting interrupts. The MPU 61 executes processing according to a control program stored in the ROM 611 or the like. Further, part or all of the processing executed by the display control device 6 may be executed by an electronic circuit.

  In addition to the control program, the ROM 611 stores a plurality of types of images such as decorative symbols used in the symbol variation display of the symbol display unit 341, a notice effect image, a reach effect image, a jackpot effect image, a loss effect image, and the like. ing. In the present embodiment, the ROM 611 further includes an event prediction image (see FIG. 45 (A)) and a segment selection image (see FIG. 45A) for causing the player to predict an event that may occur during the progress of the game in a predetermined period. 45 (B)) is also stored. Note that images displayed on the symbol display unit 341 include still images and moving images. The ROM 611 stores a display schedule corresponding to each variable display pattern command. Specifically, the display schedule includes not only the type of image to be used and the display timing, but also the change display time of the change symbol. In the display control device 6, the MPU 61 displays the image on the symbol display unit 341 in accordance with the display schedule corresponding to the variation display pattern command, thereby realizing the symbol variation display and the effect display, and the event prediction image is displayed. An expected selection screen, a segment selection screen on which a segment selection image is displayed, and the like are realized.

  The RAM 612 is a volatile storage unit that can read and write various types of information, and is used as a primary storage area (working area) for processing executed by the MPU 61. Note that the RAM 612 may be a nonvolatile storage unit.

[Discharge Control Device 7]
The payout control device 7 includes an MPU 71 and an input / output I / F 72. The MPU 71 is an arithmetic unit configured as a one-chip microcomputer. The MPU 71 includes a ROM 711 and a RAM 712.

  The ROM 711 is a nonvolatile storage unit in which a control program and parameter information are stored in advance. The RAM 712 is a volatile storage unit that can read and write various types of information, and is used as a primary storage area (working area) for processing executed by the MPU 71. Note that the RAM 712 may be a nonvolatile storage unit.

  The input / output I / F 72 is an input / output interface that inputs a signal to the payout control device 7 and outputs a control signal from the payout control device 7. Specifically, the payout device 132 and the ball lending device 100 are connected to the input / output I / F 72.

  As described above, the payout device 132 pays out a game ball from the tank 131 toward the upper plate 23, and a driving unit 132a such as a motor that drives a ball stop member that switches whether or not the game ball is paid out; A payout sensor 132b for individually detecting the game balls to be paid out. The payout control device 7 pays out an arbitrary number of game balls by controlling the drive unit 132a based on the detection result by the payout sensor 132b. Further, the dispensing control device 7 is provided with a state return switch 73. The state return switch 73 is operated, for example, in order to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error such as ball clogging of the payout device 132 occurs.

  The ball lending device 100 is installed in the island facility together with the gaming machine 10. The ball lending device 100 is stored in a recording medium such as a card inserted in the ball lending device 100 in response to an operation of a ball lending operation device (not shown) provided on the front frame 11 of the gaming machine 10. It is possible to pay out a number of game balls corresponding to an amount set in advance within the range of the amount of money being lent to the player. Specifically, when a control signal for paying out a predetermined number of game balls is input from the ball lending device 100 to the payout control device 7, the payout device 132 is controlled by the MPU 71 so that a predetermined number of game balls are received. To be paid out. The recording medium is not limited to a card, and may be a coin-type or stick-type storage medium incorporating an IC chip, for example. The ball lending device 100 may be capable of lending a predetermined number of game balls according to the cash by inserting the cash.

[Launch control device 8]
The launch control device 8 includes a launch control IC 81 that controls the driving of the game ball launch mechanism 32. Specifically, the launch control IC 81 drives the ball feeding device 322 of the game ball launching mechanism 32 while the launch handle 22 is being rotated, thereby playing the game balls stored in the upper plate 23 into the launch rail 321. Feed on top. Then, the launch control IC 81 detects the operation amount of the launch handle 22 and drives the solenoid 323 of the game ball launch mechanism 32 in accordance with the operation amount, thereby directing the game ball on the launch rail 321 toward the game board 31. To fire. At this time, the launch control IC 81 drives the ball feeding device 322 and the solenoid 323 using a clock signal that is switched ON / OFF at a preset period (for example, 0.6 sec) as a drive signal. Thereby, in the gaming machine 10, one game ball is launched toward the game area every 0.6 sec.

  Further, the firing handle 22 is provided with a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotation operation by the player, and a voltage is input to the firing control IC 81 according to the amount of rotation operation of the firing handle 22. As a result, the launch control IC 81 determines that the launch intensity of the game ball from the game ball launch mechanism 32 increases with an increase in the rotational operation amount of the launch handle 22 based on the voltage value input according to the rotational operation amount of the launch handle 22. The applied voltage to the solenoid 323 is adjusted so as to increase.

  Furthermore, the launch handle 22 includes a touch sensor 21a for detecting that the player is touching the launch handle 22, and a ball stop switch 21b for performing an operation for the player to arbitrarily stop the launch of the game ball. Is provided. The firing control IC 81 uses the touch sensor 21a and the ball stop switch 21b to detect that the player is not touching the launch handle 22 by the touch sensor 21a, or the ball stop switch 21b is operated by the player. When this is detected, the game ball launching mechanism 32 stops firing the game ball. Thereby, for example, the shooting handle 22 is fixed in a state of being rotated, and a game in a situation where the player is not touching the shooting handle 22 is prevented. Further, the player can stop the launch of the ball game ball by operating the ball stop switch 21b at any timing with the thumb or the like while rotating the launch handle 22.

[Power supply control device 9]
The power supply control device 9 generates a + 12V voltage for driving various sensors, a drive unit, and the like, a + 5V voltage for logic used in the control device, and the like. Then, the power supply control device 9 supplies the generated + 12V or + 5V voltage to the main control device 4, the sound lamp control device 5, the display control device 6, the payout control device 7, the launch control device 8, and the like.

  The power supply control device 9 is provided with a power switch 90 for turning on / off the gaming machine 10 and a RAM erasing switch 91 operated when returning the gaming machine 10 to the initial state. The gaming machine 10 is initialized when the power switch 90 is operated and the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 91 is ON.

  In addition, the power supply control device 9 is provided with a capacitor and a secondary battery as charging means that is charged by the power supplied from the power supply facility. Thereby, in the gaming machine 10, even when the power supply from the power supply facility is cut off, the information in the RAM provided in the control device is held for a predetermined period by the power discharged from the capacitor. Moreover, in the gaming machine 10, even when the power supply from the power supply facility is interrupted, the control device can be driven for a predetermined period by the power discharged from the secondary battery.

  Further, the power supply control device 9 inputs a power failure signal to the main control device 4, the sound lamp control device 5, the payout control device 7 and the like when determining that the power supply is cut off. For example, when the power supply control device 9 outputs a preset 24V DC voltage based on the power supplied from the power supply facility, the power supply control device 9 is in a power failure state when the DC voltage reaches less than the preset 22V. Judge. When the main control device 4, the audio lamp control device 5, the payout control device 7 and the like receive a power failure signal from the power supply control device 9, the control being executed is interrupted and a predetermined NMI interrupt process is executed.

[Process of main controller 4]
Next, processing executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. Specifically, in the gaming machine 10, the MPU 41 is executed at the time of power-on startup processing, main processing executed after startup processing, periodically started main timer interrupt processing, and power failure. NMI interrupt processing and the like are executed. In the present embodiment, descriptions of the start-up process, the NMI interrupt process, and the like are omitted, and the main timer interrupt process and the main process are described.

[Main timer interrupt processing of main controller 4]
Here, FIG. 14 is a flowchart for explaining an example of the procedure of the main timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 41 of the main controller 4. The main timer interrupt process is executed every 2 msec, for example. Hereinafter, the main timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S1001>
As shown in FIG. 14, in step S <b> 1001, the MPU 41 executes a sensor detection process for determining a detection state of a sensor or the like connected to the main control device 4. For example, the detection states of the incoming ball sensors 313a to 317a, the out ball sensor 35, and the like are determined. At this time, when the entry of the game ball to any of the ball entering sensors 313a to 317a is detected, the MPU 41 stores the information as winning detection information in the RAM 412. In addition, when the out ball is detected by the out ball sensor 35, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the number of out balls stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 and updates the number of out balls in the game information storage area 412d. To do. Note that the number of out balls in the game information storage area 412d is cleared to 0 when the previous 60,000 ball base B1 is calculated by reaching 60000 balls (step S1810 in the specific performance information update process in FIG. 22). reference).

<Step S1002>
In step S1002, the MPU 41 updates the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter value in the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value.

<Step S1003>
Subsequently, in step S1003, the MPU 41 updates the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the ordinary hit random number counter C4. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter values in the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the ordinary hit random number counter C4, and these counter values reach the maximum values. In this case, the counter value is cleared to zero.

<Steps S1004 and S1005>
Thereafter, the MPU 41 executes a start winning process associated with winning the first winning port 314 or the second winning port 315 (step S1004), and executes a launch control process (step S1005). Details of the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, in the launch control process, the game ball is on condition that the touch sensor 21a detects that the player is touching the launch handle 22 and the ball stop switch 21b for stopping the launch is not operated. It is a process to enable the launch of. In addition, the launch control process invalidates the launch of the game ball when the touch sensor 21a detects that the player is not touching the launch handle 22 or when the ball stop switch 21b is operated. It is processing to do. The MPU 41 instructs the launch control device 8 to launch a game ball when the game ball launch is valid.

<Step S1006>
In step S1006, the MPU 41 draws a lottery for determining whether or not to open the electric combination 315b of the second winning opening 315 based on the normal winning random number counter C4 stored in the electric combination holding area 412c. The through gate process is executed. Specifically, in the through gate process, first, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the current gaming state is the high frequency support mode based on the high frequency support mode flag. If the normal hit random number counter C4 is 0 to 29, the MPU 41 determines that the normal symbol is won when the normal hit random number counter C4 is 30 to 249. It is judged that. In addition, in the high frequency support mode, the MPU 41 determines that the normal symbol random number counter C4 is 0 to 199, and determines that the normal symbol is won, and the normal hit random number counter C4 is 200 to 249. It is judged that. When the MPU 41 determines that the normal symbol is won in the through gate process, the MPU 315b opens the electric accessory 315b for a predetermined time. As a result, it is possible to win the second winning opening 315 at the upper right of the game board 31 in which the electric accessory 315b is arranged in parallel.

[Start-up winning process]
Here, FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the start winning process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1004 in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. Hereinafter, the start winning process will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S1101>
As shown in FIG. 15, in step S <b> 1101, the MPU 41 determines whether or not there is a winning for the first winning opening 314. Here, if the MPU 41 determines that there is a winning for the first winning opening 314 (step S1101: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1102, and if it is determined that there is no winning for the first winning opening 314 (step S1101: No). ), The process proceeds to step S1106.

<Steps S1102 and S1103>
In step S1102, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the hold number N stored in the hold number storage area NAA of the RAM 412 is the maximum hold number (4 in the present embodiment). Here, the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1106 if the number of holds N is the maximum number of holds (step S1102: Yes). On the other hand, if the number of reservations N is not the maximum number of reservations (step S1102: No), the MPU 41 adds 1 to the number of reservations N (step S1103).

<Step S1104>
In step S1104, the MPU 41 is updated in the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S1003 in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. 14, and in the main process of FIG. 17 described later. The counter value with the variation type counter CS1 (steps S1302 and S1312) is acquired, and the counter value is the first of the first reserved areas REA1 to REA4 of the first reserved storage area REA of the reserved storage area 412b in the RAM 412. Store in the free hold area.

<Step S1105>
In step S1105, the MPU 41 displays the contents of the success / failure information before the success / failure information for the first hold acquired in step S1104 is determined to be a jackpot success / failure determination target in the later-described change start process (S1408 in FIG. 18, FIG. 20). Confirmation is performed, and a first hold command setting process for setting the first hold command in the RAM 412 is executed based on the check result. Details of the first hold command setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S1106>
In step S1106, the MPU 41 determines whether or not there is a winning for the second winning opening 315. Here, when the MPU 41 determines that there is a winning for the second winning opening 315 (step S1106: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1107, and when it is determined that there is no winning for the second winning opening 315 (step S1106: No). ), The start winning process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S1005 in FIG.

<Steps S1107 and S1108>
In step S <b> 1107, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the hold number M stored in the hold number storage area NAB of the RAM 412 is the maximum hold number (4 in the present embodiment). Here, if the number of reservations M is the maximum number of reservations (step S1107: Yes), the MPU 41 ends the start winning process and moves the process to step S1005 of FIG. On the other hand, if the number of reservations M is not the maximum number of reservations (step S1107: No), the MPU 41 adds 1 to the number of reservations M (step S1108).

<Step S1109>
In step S1109, the MPU 41 is updated by the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S1003 in the main timer interruption process of FIG. 14, and the main process of FIG. The counter value with the variation type counter CS1 (steps S1302 and S1312) is acquired, and the counter value is the first of the first reserved areas REB1 to REB4 of the second reserved storage area REB of the reserved storage area 412b in the RAM 412. Store in the free hold area.

<Step S1110>
In step S1110, the MPU 41 determines whether the success / failure information for the second hold acquired in step S1109 is subject to the determination of the success / failure process (S1408 in FIG. 18, FIG. 20) described later. The content is confirmed, and a second hold command setting process for setting the second hold command in the RAM 412 is executed based on the check result. Here, the second hold command setting process is the same as the first hold command setting process described later with reference to FIG. In the second hold command setting process, in the first hold command setting process of FIG. 16, “first hold command” is read as “second hold command” and “hold number N” is read as “hold number M”. Good.

[First pending command setting process]
Here, FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing a procedure of the first hold command setting process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1105 in the start winning process of FIG. The first hold command includes information indicating that the command is the first hold command, and information such as the type of the first hold command (big hit type or miss), a variation pattern, and the number N of hold. . Hereinafter, the first pending command setting process will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S1201>
As shown in FIG. 16, the MPU 41 reads the hold number N from the hold number storage area NAA of the first hold storage area REA and reads the value of the big hit random number counter C1 corresponding to each first hold from the RAM 412 (step S1201).

<Step S1202>
In step S1202, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the mode is the high probability mode. If the MPU 41 is in the high probability mode (step S1202: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1203, and if not in the high probability mode (step S1202). : No), the process proceeds to step S1204. For example, the MPU 41 is set to ON when shifting to the high probability mode in the gaming state transition processing (step S1306 in FIG. 17) in the main processing described later, whether or not the high probability mode is set. Judgment is made based on a high probability mode flag that is set to OFF at the time of transition to another gaming state such as a state.

<Steps S1203 and S1204>
In step S1203, the MPU 41 reads out the high probability mode determination table (see FIG. 8B) stored in accordance with the game setting value in step S1712 in the game setting value change process of FIG. Based on the success / failure table, whether or not the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read in step S1201 is a value corresponding to the jackpot winning is executed. On the other hand, in step S1204, the MPU 41 reads the low probability mode acceptance / rejection table (see FIG. 8A) stored in accordance with the game setting value in step S1712 in the game setting value changing process of FIG. Based on the probability mode success / failure table, whether or not the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read in step S1201 is a value corresponding to the jackpot winning is executed.

  In steps S1203 and S1204, determination of success / failure is executed based on the high probability mode success / failure table or the low probability mode success / failure table stored in accordance with the game setting value in step S1712 in the game setting value changing process of FIG. However, in step S1203 or S1204, after reading the game setting value stored in step S1710 in the game setting value changing process of FIG. 21 described later, a high probability mode success / failure table or a low probability corresponding to the game setting value is read. The mode determination table may be selected one by one to perform the determination.

<Step S1205>
In step S1205, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to the jackpot winning. If the MPU 41 determines that the counter value read from the jackpot random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to the jackpot winning (step S1205: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1206, and the jackpot random number counter C1 If it is determined that the counter value read out from is not a value corresponding to the jackpot winning (step S1205: No), the process proceeds to step S1208.

<Step S1206>
In step S1206, the MPU 41 reads out the counter values of the big hit type counter C2 and the fluctuation type counter CS1 from the RAM 412. For example, when the success / failure information is stored in the third reserved area REA3 in step S1104 in the start winning process of FIG. 15, the jackpot type counter C2 and the variation type included in the success / failure information stored in the third reserved area REA3. The counter value of the counter CS1 is read. Of the first reserved area REA1 to the fourth reserved area REA4, the reserved area in which the success / failure information is stored in step S1104 in the start winning process of FIG. 15 is the value of the reserved number N stored in the reserved number storage area NA. It can be judged by.

<Step S1207>
In step S1207, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot type counter C2, the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the hold number N to the first hold command. Thus, since the first hold command includes the hold number N read in step S1201, the MPU 51 of the voice lamp control device 5 that receives the first hold command receives the hold number included in the first hold command. By referring to N, it is possible to recognize which of the first hold area REA1 to the fourth hold area REA4 corresponds to the validity information stored in the first hold area REA1.

<Steps S1208 and S1209>
In step S1208, the MPU 41 reads the counter value of the variation type counter CS1 from the RAM 412. Next, the MPU 41 sets information indicating that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is out of date, the variation type counter CS1 and the number of holds N in the first hold command (step S1209).

  Note that the first hold command that is set to ON in the first hold command setting process is stored in the RAM 412, and the other is performed in step S1301 of the main process in FIG. After being transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 together with this command, it is deleted. Furthermore, the content of the first hold command described here is merely an example, and the content is not limited to that described here as long as the voice lamp control device 5 can grasp the same content as the hold command. For example, it is conceivable that part or all of the information of the first pending command is included in another command.

[Main processing of main controller 4]
Next, the main process executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 will be described with reference to FIG. In the main process, main control processes for the progress of the variable game and the jackpot game are executed. In the main process, the processes of steps S1301 to S1309 are executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 msec, for example, and the counter update process of steps S1310 to S1312 is executed with the remaining time from the end of the process of steps S1301 to S1309 to the next period. The

<Step S1301>
As shown in FIG. 17, in step S1301, the MPU 41 sends output data such as a command set in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. 14 or the previous main process to a control device such as the sub control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140. Execute the external output process to be sent to. For example, when commands such as a variation pattern command, a first hold command, a second hold command, a shift command, a jackpot start command, a round game start command, an ending start command, and a game setting value change command are set in the RAM 412 The command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5. If a prize ball command is set in the RAM 412 in the prize ball command setting process in step S1303 described later in the main process, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 7.

<Step S1302>
In step S1302, the MPU 41 updates the value of the variation type counter CS1. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter value in the variation type counter CS1, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value.

<Step S1303>
In step S <b> 1303, the MPU 41 sets a prize ball command to be output to the payout control device 7 and the sub control unit 332 in the RAM 412. Specifically, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a winning has occurred at the general winning opening 313, the variable winning opening 316, etc. based on the winning detection information stored in the RAM 412. If a winning has occurred, a winning ball command indicating the number of winning balls to be paid out according to the winning is set in the RAM 412. At this time, in the normal gaming state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode), the MPU 41 stores in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 when a winning is generated in the general winning opening 313 or the first winning opening 314. The number of paid-out balls for the general winning opening or the number of paid-out balls for the first winning opening is updated to a value obtained by adding the number of paid-out balls for the current winning. In addition, the MPU 41 determines whether the RAM 412 is in the short-time gaming state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode) or the probability variation gaming state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode) when a winning is generated at the second winning opening 315. The number of balls paid out in the second winning opening stored in the game information storage area 412d is updated to a value obtained by adding the number of balls paid out in this winning. Further, in the jackpot gaming state, the MPU 41 uses the variable winning opening payout ball number stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 in the case of winning in the variable winning opening 316 as the number of payout balls due to this winning. Is updated to the value obtained by adding.

<Step S1304>
In step S1304, the MPU 41 executes a variable game control process for controlling a game in the variable game. The details of the variable game control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 18. In the variable game control process, the above-mentioned jackpot lottery is executed, and a change pattern command necessary for the symbol change display by the symbol display unit 341 is set. Is done. At this time, the MPU 41 updates the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S1003 of the main timer interrupt process of FIG. 14, and the fluctuations updated in steps S1302 and S1312 of this process. Based on each value of the type counter CS1, a variation pattern command indicating the lottery result of lottery lottery and the variation display time is set in the RAM 412.

<Step S1305>
In step S1305, the MPU 41 executes a jackpot game control process for controlling the progress of the game in the jackpot game. In the jackpot game control process, a control process for the jackpot game including the opening, the opening / closing execution mode and the ending is executed. In the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 41 controls the opening / closing operation of the open / close door 319 for the round game in which the variable winning opening 316 is opened, and the result of the jackpot lottery that triggered the transition to the jackpot game (a jackpot type) ) Run as many times as you like. For example, when the jackpot type is 5R normal jackpot and 5R probability variable jackpot, the MPU 41 executes the round game five times, and when the jackpot type is 16R probability jackpot, the round game is executed 16 times. In the jackpot game control process, a round game start command is set in the RAM 412 when starting each round game in the opening / closing execution mode, and an ending start command is set in the RAM 412 when starting ending.

<Step S1306>
In step S1306, the MPU 41 executes a game state transition process for shifting the gaming state based on the lottery result of the big hit lottery in step S1602 or S1603 in the variation start process of FIG. In the gaming state transition process, the MPU 41 changes the gaming state when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the jackpot gaming state in which the opening / closing execution mode is executed, the probability variation gaming state in which the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode are in effect, the low probability mode and the high probability mode. A transition is made to a short game state in the frequency support mode, a normal game state in the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode, or the like.

  For example, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the MPU 41 shifts the gaming state to the jackpot gaming state after the end of the variable game that notifies the lottery result. At this time, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot gaming state flag stored in the RAM 412 to ON. In addition, when the jackpot game ends, the MPU 41 shifts the gaming state from the jackpot gaming state to a predetermined gaming state according to the lottery result in the jackpot lottery that triggered the execution of the jackpot game. In the present embodiment, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is 5R probability variation jackpot or 16R probability variation jackpot, the MPU 41 shifts to the probability variation gaming state after the jackpot game ends, and the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is 5R normal jackpot. In some cases, after the jackpot game is over, a transition to the short-time game state is made. In addition, when the notification of the lottery result for the specified number of jackpot lotteries is completed in the short-time gaming state, the gaming state is shifted to the normal gaming state after the end of the variable game.

  Further, when the transition of the gaming state is made, the MPU 41 sets the flag for the gaming state before the transition to OFF, and sets the flag for the gaming state after the transition to ON. For example, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot game flag to OFF and sets the high probability mode flag to ON when the game state transitions from the jackpot game state to the probability change game state. On the other hand, when there is a transition from the probabilistic gaming state to the jackpot gaming state, the high probability mode flag is set to off while the jackpot gaming flag is set to on.

  Further, when the MPU 41 shifts the gaming state to the jackpot gaming state, the MPU 41 sets a jackpot gaming start command in the RAM 412 and adds 1 to “the number of jackpots” stored in the gaming information storage area 412d set in the RAM 412.

<Step S1307>
In step S1307, the MPU 41 executes a game setting value change process. In this game setting value change process, a process for controlling the display or non-display of the game setting value or the change of the game setting value stored in the game information storage area 412d according to the operation on the setting value changing operation unit 46 is executed. The Details of the game setting value changing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the present embodiment, the game setting value changing process is executed in the main process. However, during the start-up process that is activated when the power is turned on, or after the start-up process, the launch of the game ball is started. It is also conceivable that the execution is limited. As a result, after the game is started by the player, the game setting value cannot be changed until the next power-on, so that the game setting value can be changed within the business hall operating hours. Can be prevented.

<Step S1308>
In step S1308, the MPU 41 executes a specific performance information update process in the game information. In the present embodiment, the base information, the number of lottery per unit lottery, the continuous bonus rate, and the bonus rate are updated as the specific performance information. Details of the specific performance information update process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

<Step S1309>
In step S1309, the MPU 41 executes display control processing of the performance display monitor 43. In the display control process of the performance display monitor 43, a process of displaying the base information updated in step S1308 on the performance display monitor 43 is executed. Details of the display control process of the performance display monitor 43 will be described later with reference to FIGS.

<Step S1310>
In step S1310, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the next main process execution timing has arrived, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current main process. Here, when the MPU 41 determines that the execution timing of the next main process has arrived (step S1310: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1301, and each process after S1301 described above is executed. On the other hand, when the MPU 41 determines that the execution timing of the next main process has not arrived (step S1310: No), until the execution timing of the next main process arrives, that is, at the execution timing of the next main process. During the remaining time until the next time, until it is determined that the execution timing of the next main process has arrived (step S1310: Yes), step S1310, step S1311, and step S1312 are repeatedly executed.

<Step S1311>
In step S1311, the MPU 41 updates the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter value in the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value.

<Step S1312>
In step S1312, the MPU 41 updates the variation type counter CS1. Specifically, 1 is added to the counter value in the variation type counter CS1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, the counter value is cleared to 0. Then, after updating the variation type counter CS1, the MPU 41 returns the process to step S1310.

[Variable game control processing]
FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the variable game control process executed in step S1304 in the main process of FIG. Hereinafter, the variable game control process will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S1401>
As shown in FIG. 18, in step S1401, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the gaming machine 10 is in a jackpot game, and if it is in a jackpot game (step S1401: Yes), the variable game control process is performed. When the game is over and the game is not in a jackpot game (step S1401: No), the process proceeds to step S1402. Whether or not the jackpot game is executed is set to ON when shifting to the jackpot gaming state in the gaming state transition process of step S1306 in the main process of FIG. 17, for example, and is turned OFF when shifting from the jackpot gaming state to another gaming state. Judgment is made based on the jackpot game flag set.

<Step S1402>
In step S1402, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the symbol variation is being displayed. If the symbol variation is being displayed (step S1402: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1403, and if the symbol variation is not being displayed. (Step S1402: No), the process proceeds to Step S1406. For example, whether or not the symbol variation display is in progress is set to ON at the start of variation display in step S1606 in the variation start process of FIG. 20 described later, and the variation display time has elapsed (step S1403: Yes). This determination is made based on the variable display flag set to OFF in step S1405 of the variable game control process.

<Step S1403>
In step S1403, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the variable display time has elapsed since the start of the symbol variable display. If the MPU 41 determines that the variable display time has elapsed (step S1403: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1404. If it is determined that the variable display time has not elapsed (step S1403: No), the variable game control process ends.

<Steps S1404 and S1405>
When the variable display time has elapsed (step S1403: Yes), the MPU 41 causes the 7-segment display 372, 373 of the main display unit 37 to stop display the symbol corresponding to the result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the variable game ( In step S1404), the variable display flag is set to OFF (step S1405).

<Step S1406>
When the symbol variation display is not being performed (step S1402: No), the MPU 41 sets the number of holds N stored in the hold number storage area NAA of the hold storage area 412b and the number of holds M stored in the hold number storage area NAB. It is determined whether or not both are 0 (step S1406). Here, the MPU 41 ends the variable game control process when both the hold number N and the hold number M are 0 (step S1406: Yes). On the other hand, when either one of the hold number N and the hold number M is not 0 (step S1406: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1407.

<Step S1407>
In step S1407, the MPU 41 executes a data setting process for the data of the validity information stored in the hold storage area 412b. If the MPU 41 ends the process of step S1407, the process proceeds to step S1408. Details of the data setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S1408>
In step S1408, the MPU 41 executes a change start process for causing the symbol display unit 341 to execute a change display based on the validity information, and ends the change game control process. Details of the change start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Data setting process]
Here, FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the data setting process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1407 in the variable game control process of FIG. Hereinafter, the data setting process will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S1501>
As shown in FIG. 19, in step S1501, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the number of holds M corresponding to the second special symbol game is 0, and when the number of holds M is 0 (step S1501: Yes). Then, the process proceeds to step S1502. On the other hand, when the number M of holds is not 0 (step S1501: No), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1505.

<Steps S1502 to S1504>
When the number M of holdings is 0 (step S1501: Yes), the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the number N of holdings stored in the holding number storage area NAA (step S1502), and moves from the first holding area REA1 to the execution area AE. The success / failure information is moved (step S1503). Subsequently, the MPU 41 shifts the success / failure information of the second reservation area REA2 to the fourth reservation area REA4 one by one (step S1504). Specifically, in step S1504, the success / failure information of the second reservation area REA2 is moved to the first reservation area REA1, the success / failure information of the third reservation area REA3 is moved to the second reservation area REA2, and the fourth reservation area REA4 The success / failure information is moved to the third reserved area REA3. When the process of step S1504 ends, the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1508.

<Steps S1505 to S1507>
Step S1505 is shifted to the case where the holding number M is 0 (step S1501: No), but step S1501 is either or both of the holding number M and the holding number N in step S1406 in the variable game control process of FIG. If NO is not 0, the process proceeds (step S1406: NO). Therefore, the MPU 41 executes the processing of steps S1505 to S1507 because it can be determined that the hold number N is not 0 when the hold number M is 0 (step S1501: No).

  Specifically, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the reservation number M stored in the reservation number storage area NAB (step S1505), and moves the success / failure information from the first reservation area REB1 to the execution area AE (step S1506). Subsequently, the MPU 41 shifts the success / failure information of the second reservation area REB2 to the fourth reservation area REB4 one by one (step S1507). Specifically, in step S1507, the validity information of the second reservation area REB2 is moved to the first reservation area REB1, the validity information of the third reservation area REB3 is moved to the second reservation area REB2, and the fourth reservation area REB4 The success / failure information is moved to the third reserved area REB3. When the process of step S1507 ends, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1508.

<Step S1508>
In step S1508, the MPU 41 sets a shift command in the RAM 412 indicating that the validity information of the first reserved area REA1 to the fourth reserved area REA4 or the first reserved area REB1 to the fourth reserved area REB4 has been shifted. The shift command set in step S1508 is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output process in step S1301 of the next main process (see FIG. 17) executed by the MPU 41. Thereby, the display number etc. of the pending | holding symbol displayed on the symbol display part 341 are changed. When the process of step S1508 ends, the MPU 41 ends the data setting process, and the process proceeds to step S1408 in FIG.

[Variation start processing]
Here, FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the change start process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1408 in the change game control process of FIG. Hereinafter, the variation start process will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S1601>
As shown in FIG. 20, in step S1601, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the gaming state is a high probability mode. Whether or not the high probability mode is set is determined based on, for example, whether or not the high probability mode flag that is set to ON in the gaming state transition process of step S1306 in the main process of FIG. 17 is set to ON. . When the gaming state is in the high probability mode (step S1601: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1602, and when the gaming state is not in the high probability mode (step S1601: No), that is, the gaming state is in the low probability mode. If there is, the process proceeds to step S1603.

<Steps S1602 and S1603>
In step S1602, the MPU 41 holds the reserved storage area based on the high probability mode determination table (see FIG. 8B) stored in accordance with the game setting value in step S1712 in the game setting value changing process of FIG. Whether or not the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 included as numerical information in the hit information stored in the execution area AE 412b is a value corresponding to the jackpot winning is determined. On the other hand, in step S1603, the MPU 41 holds based on the low probability mode acceptance / rejection table (see FIG. 8A) stored in accordance with the game setting value in step S1712 in the game setting value changing process of FIG. Whether or not the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 included as numerical information in the hit information stored in the execution area AE of the storage area 412b is a value corresponding to the jackpot winning is determined.

  Note that in steps S1602 and S1603, determination of success / failure is performed based on the high probability mode success / failure table or the low probability mode success / failure table stored in accordance with the game setting value in step S1712 in the game setting value changing process of FIG. However, in steps S1602 and S1603, after reading out the game setting value stored in step S1710 in the game setting value changing process of FIG. 21 described later, a high probability mode success / failure table or a low probability corresponding to the game setting value is read. The mode determination table may be selected one by one to perform the determination.

<Step S1604>
In step S1604, the MPU 41 sets the variation display time of the 7-segment display 372, 373 of the main display unit 37 corresponding to the variation pattern of the variation game in the variation display time counter. Specifically, when the determination result in step S1602 or S1603 is a normal jackpot, the MPU 41 sets a variation pattern based on the variation type counter CS1 and the normal jackpot variation table (see FIG. 9A). Identify. Further, when the result of the determination in step S1602 or S1603 is a probability variation jackpot, the MPU 41 identifies a variation pattern based on the variation type counter CS1 and the probability variation jackpot variation table (see FIG. 9B). . Further, if the result of the determination in step S1602 or S1603 is out of place, the MPU 41 specifies a variation pattern based on the variation type counter CS1 and the out-of-range variation table (see FIG. 9C).

<Step S1605>
In step S1605, the MPU 41 sets a variation pattern command including the lottery result in the jackpot lottery for the variation game and the variation pattern specified in step S1604 in the RAM 412. Thereby, in step S1301 of the next main process (see FIG. 17) executed by the MPU 41, the fluctuation pattern command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5, and the voice lamp control device 5 displays the symbol based on the fluctuation pattern command. The symbol variation display by the unit 341 is executed.

  Note that, as described above, when the lottery result is “ordinary jackpot”, the MPU 41 adds “A” indicating “5R regular jackpot” to the variation patterns “01” to “03”. Any of “A03” is set in the RAM 412 as a variation pattern command. Further, when the lottery result is “5R probability variation jackpot”, the MPU 41 adds any of “B01” to “B03” with “B” indicating that the variation pattern “01” to “03” is 5R probability variation jackpot. Is set in the RAM 412 as a variation pattern command. Further, when the lottery result is “16R probability variation jackpot”, the MPU 41 adds any of “C01” to “C03” with “C” added to the variation patterns “01” to “03” indicating that it is a 16R probability variation jackpot. Is set in the RAM 412 as a variation pattern command. In addition, when the lottery result is “out”, the MPU 41 changes any one of “D01” to “D08” with “D” indicating that it is out of the variation patterns “01” to “08”. It is set in the RAM 412 as a command. Further, when the lottery result is “off”, the MPU 41 includes information on whether the front / rear out of reach, reach other than out of front / back out, or complete out is included in the variation pattern command.

<Step S1606>
In step S1606, the MPU 41 starts symbol variation display on the main display unit 37, and ends the variation start process. When the MPU 41 starts the symbol variation display on the main display unit 37, the MPU 41 sets the variation display flag to ON. This variable display flag is referred to in step S1402 in the variable game control process of FIG. 18 to determine whether or not the symbol variation display of the main display unit 37 is being performed. In addition, when the MPU 41 starts the symbol variation display on the main display unit 37, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the “cumulative jackpot lottery count” stored in the game information storage area 412 d set in the RAM 412. Further, when the result of the determination of success / failure based on the low probability mode success / failure table in step S1603 is out of order, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the “number of consecutive failures” stored in the game information storage area 412d, and the success / failure result is a big hit. In some cases, the “number of consecutive failures” is cleared to zero.

[Game setting value change processing]
FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the game setting value change process executed in step S1307 of the main process in FIG. Hereinafter, the game setting value changing process will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S1701>
As shown in FIG. 21, in step S1701, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the symbol variation display is in progress. If the symbol variation display is in progress (step S1701: Yes), the game setting value change processing is terminated. If the symbol variation display is not in progress (step S1701: No), the process proceeds to step S1702. For example, whether or not the symbol variation display is being performed is determined based on the variation display flag that is set to ON in step S1606 in the variation start process of FIG.

<Step S1702>
When the symbol variation display is not being performed (step S1701: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the jackpot gaming state is set (step S1702). If the jackpot gaming state is set (step S1702: Yes), the game setting is made. When the value change process is finished and the game is not in the jackpot gaming state (step S1702: No), the process proceeds to step S1703. For example, whether or not the game state is a jackpot gaming state is determined based on the jackpot gaming state flag set to ON in the gaming state transition process of step S1306 in the main process of FIG.

<Step S1703>
When neither the symbol variation display nor the big hit gaming state is present (both No in steps S1701 and S1702), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the power of the game setting value display unit 45 has been switched from off to on (step S1703). It is determined whether or not an operation to turn on the game setting value display unit 45 has been performed on the setting value change operation unit 46. In other words, in the present embodiment, when the symbol variation display is in progress (step S1701: Yes) or when the jackpot gaming state is in effect (step S1702: Yes), the game setting value is not displayed and the game setting value can be changed. Absent. Here, when the power of the game setting value display unit 45 is switched from off to on (step S1703: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1704, and the power of the game setting value display unit 45 is turned on from off. If not switched to (step S1703: No), the process proceeds to step S1707.

<Steps S1704 to S1706>
When the power of the game setting value display unit 45 is switched from OFF to ON (step S1703: YES), the MPU 41 reads out the game setting value stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 in step S1710 described later (step S1703). In step S1704, a number indicating the read game setting value is displayed on the game setting value display unit 45 (step S1705). Thereby, the current game setting value can be confirmed. Then, the MPU 41 turns on a setting value display flag indicating that the game setting value is displayed on the game setting value display unit 45 (step S1706), and ends the game setting value changing process.

<Step S1707>
When the power of the game set value display unit 45 is not switched from off to on (step S1703: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the set value display flag is set to on (step S1707). The set value display flag indicates that the game set value is displayed on the game set value display unit 45 as described above, and is set to ON in step S1706. When the setting value display flag is set on (step S1707: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1708, and when the setting value display flag is set off (step S1707: No). That is, when the game setting value display unit 45 is turned off and the power is not turned on, the game setting value changing process is terminated.

<Step S1708>
When the set value display flag is set to ON (step S1707: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the set value change operation unit 46 has been rotated by a predetermined angle (step S1708). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a rotation operation for changing the game setting value has been performed. When the set value change operation unit 46 is rotated by a predetermined angle (step S1708: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1709, and when the set value change operation unit 46 is not rotated (step S1708: No). The processing moves to step S1711.

<Step S1709>
When the set value change operation unit 46 is rotated by a predetermined angle (step S1708: Yes), the MPU 41 executes a process of changing the display on the game set value display unit 45 (step S1709). For example, the MPU 41 displays a number one larger than the number displayed on the game set value display unit 45 before the rotation when the set value change operation unit 46 is rotated to the right by a predetermined angle. Conversely, when the set value change operation unit 46 is rotated to the left by a predetermined angle, a number that is one smaller than the number displayed on the game set value display unit 45 is displayed before the rotation.

  If the number displayed on the game set value display unit 45 before the rotation is “4”, and the set value change operation unit 46 is rotated to the right by a predetermined angle, the game set value display unit 45 is displayed. When the displayed number is changed to “1” and the number displayed on the game set value display unit 45 before the rotation is “1”, the set value change operation unit 46 is rotated to the left by a predetermined angle. In this case, the number displayed on the game setting value display unit 45 is changed to “4”. Further, when the number displayed on the game setting value display unit 45 is “4”, the number displayed on the game setting value display unit 45 is set to “1” so as not to rotate further to the right. In this case, it may be prevented from rotating further to the left.

<Step S1710>
In step S1710, the MPU 41 overwrites the game setting value in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 with the number being displayed on the game setting value display unit 45 as a game setting value, and ends the game setting value changing process. As a result, when the power of the setting value changing operation unit 46 is switched from on to off, the game setting value stored in the RAM 412 immediately before the power is turned off is finally stored in the RAM 412 as an effective game setting value. It is stored in the game information storage area 412d. Therefore, the game setting value stored in the RAM 412 is changed by changing the number displayed on the game setting value display unit 45 by rotating the setting value changing operation unit 46. Then, the game setting value can be determined by turning off the power of the game setting value display unit 45 in a state where the number corresponding to the target game setting value is displayed on the game setting value display unit 45.

<Step S1711>
When the set value change operation unit 46 is not rotated by a predetermined angle (step S1708: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the power of the game set value display unit 45 is switched from on to off (step S1711), that is, the set value. It is determined whether or not an operation for turning off the game setting value display unit 45 has been performed on the change operation unit 46. When the power of the game setting value display unit 45 is switched from on to off (step S1711: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1712, and the power of the game setting value display unit 45 is switched from on to off. If not (step S1711: No), the game setting value changing process is terminated. In addition, when the power supply of the game setting value display part 45 is switched from ON to OFF (step S1711: Yes), in the game setting value display part 45, the energization to the 7-segment display is cut off, thereby the game setting value. The number indicating is turned off, and the game setting value is determined as described above.

<Steps S1712 and S1713>
When the power of the game setting value display unit 45 is switched from on to off (step S1711: Yes), the MPU 41 is in the low probability mode according to the game setting value stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 in step S1710. The success / failure table (see FIG. 8A) and the high probability mode success / failure table (see FIG. 8B) are selected and stored in the RAM 412 (step S1712). Then, the MPU 41 sets the setting value display flag to OFF, and ends the game setting value changing process.

  Here, in step S1712, a low probability mode success / failure table (see FIG. 8A) and a high probability mode success / failure table (see FIG. 8B) corresponding to the game setting values stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. ) Is selected. That is, since the success / failure table of the same game setting value is selected in the low probability mode success / failure table and the high probability mode success / failure table, the game setting value changing operation is easy. However, the game setting value in the low probability mode and the game setting value in the high probability mode may be individually changeable. In this case, for example, the game setting value in the low probability mode is set to “1” and the game setting value in the high probability mode is set to “4”. It becomes possible to make it a set value.

[Performance information update processing]
Here, FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the specific performance information update process executed in step S1309 in the main process of FIG. FIG. 23 is a diagram illustrating an example of the base information updated in the specific performance information update process of FIG. The specific performance information update process will be described below with reference to FIGS. 22 and 23.

<Steps S1801 to S1803>
As shown in FIG. 22, the MPU 41 reads out the number of various payout balls stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 (step S1801), and further determines the number of out balls stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. Reading is performed (step S1802). Here, the number of payout balls is the number of payout balls necessary for updating the base information and the like. The number of payout balls for the general winning opening, the number of payout balls for the first winning mouth, the number of payout balls for the second winning mouth, and the variable payout opening ball Number is applicable. Then, the MPU 41 calculates the current base BL based on the read number of general winning award payout balls, the number of first payout payout balls, and the number of out balls, and the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is calculated. The current base BL is overwritten and updated (step S1803) (see FIG. 23A). The current base BL (%) is calculated as 100 × (number of payouts for general winning mouth + number of payouts for first winning mouth) / out number of balls.

<Steps S1804 and S1805>
The MPU 41 reads the cumulative jackpot lottery count (cumulative variation display count) stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 (step S1804), and updates the unit jackpot lottery count stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. (Step S1805). The number of lottery per unit jackpot is calculated as the number of symbol variations displayed on the 7-segment display 372 (the number of times the jackpot lottery is received) until the number of minus difference balls in the normal gaming state is 250. Specifically, the number of lottery per unit jackpot = “cumulative jackpot lottery count” / ((“number of out balls” − “number of balls paid out for general winning mouth” − “number of balls paid out for first winning mouth”) / 250 balls) Is done. In the present embodiment, the “unit jackpot lottery count” is calculated as the cumulative unit jackpot lottery count from when the gaming machine 10 is installed in the game hall to the present.

<Step S1806>
In step S1806, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the number of out balls read out in step S1802 has reached 60000 balls. If the number of out balls has reached 60000 balls (step S1806: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1807. If the number of out balls has not reached 60000 balls (step S1806: No), the process proceeds to step S1811.

<Steps S1807 to S1810>
When the number of out balls has reached 60000 balls (step S1806: Yes), the MPU 41 updates the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 (step S1807). Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 23A and 23B, the MPU 41 shifts the previous 60,000 ball base B1 to the 60,000 ball base last time in the base information (step S1807), and step S1803. The current base BL updated in step S1 is shifted to the previous 60,000 ball base B1 (step S1808), and the current base BL is cleared to 0 (step S1809). Then, the MPU 41 updates specific performance information other than the base (step S1810), clears the number of various payout balls and the number of out balls in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 to 0 balls (step S1811), and The performance information update process ends.

[Display control processing of performance display monitor]
24 to 27 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the display control process of the performance display monitor 43 executed in step S1309 of the main process of FIG. Hereinafter, the display control process of the performance display monitor 43 will be described with reference to FIGS.

<Step S1901>
As shown in FIG. 24, in step S1901, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the BL display flag is set to ON. Here, the BL display flag is a flag indicating that the current base BL is displayed on the performance display monitor 43, and is set to ON in step S1906 described later or step S1930 in FIG. When the BL display flag is set on (step S1901: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1908 in FIG. 25, and when the BL display flag is set off (step S1901: No). ), The process proceeds to step S1902.

<Step S1902>
If the BL display flag is set to off (step S1901: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the B1 display flag is set to on (step S1902). Here, the B1 display flag is a flag indicating that the previous 60,000 ball base B1 has been displayed on the performance display monitor 43, and is set to ON in step S1912 of FIG. If the B1 display flag is set on (step S1902: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1917 of FIG. 26, and if the B1 display flag is set off (step S1902: No). ), The process proceeds to step S1903.

<Step S1903>
When the B1 display flag is set to off (step S1902: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the B2 display flag is set to on (step S1903). Here, the B2 display flag is a flag indicating that the 60,000 ball base B2 has been displayed two times before the performance display monitor 43, and is set to ON in step S1921 of FIG. When the B2 display flag is set on (step S1903: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1926 in FIG. 27, and when the B2 display flag is set off (step S1903: No). ), The process proceeds to step S1904.

<Step S1904>
If the B2 display flag is set to off (step S1903: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the performance display switch 44 has been switched from off to on (step S1904). When the performance display switch 44 is switched from off to on (step S1904: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1905, and when the performance display switch 44 is not switched from off to on (step S1904: No), The display control process ends.

<Steps S1905 to S1907>
When the performance display switch 44 is switched from OFF to ON (step S1904: YES), the MPU 41 causes the performance display monitor 43 to display the current base BL included in the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. (Step S1905). For example, when the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is the example shown in FIG. 23A, the current base BL is 29% indicating “8.”, “L”, “ 2 ”and“ 9 ”are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43, and the base information is the example shown in FIG. 23B, the current base BL is 0%. “8.”, “L”, “0”, and “0” indicating the presence are displayed on the four 7-segment indicators 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43. Then, the MPU 41 sets the BL display flag to ON (step S1906), sets a BL display time counter for displaying the current base BL on the performance display monitor 43 for a predetermined time (step S1907), and performs the display control processing. Exit.

<Steps S1908 and S1909>
When the BL display flag is set to ON (step S1901: Yes), as shown in FIG. 25, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the BL display time counter set in step S1907 of FIG. In step S1908, it is determined whether the value of the BL display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1909). When the value of the BL display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1909: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1910, and when the value of the BL display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S1909: No) ), And the process proceeds to step S1914.

<Steps S1910 to S1913>
When the value of the BL display time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S1909: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the BL display flag off (step S1910), and the base stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 The previous 60,000 ball base B1 included in the information is displayed on the performance display monitor 43 (step S1911). For example, when the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is the example shown in FIG. 23A, “8.”, “1” indicating that the previous 60,000 ball base B1 is 33%. ”,“ 3 ”,“ 3 ”are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43, and the base information is the example shown in FIG. “8.”, “1”, “2” and “9” indicating that the base B1 is 29% are displayed on the four 7-segment indicators 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43. Then, the MPU 41 sets the B1 display flag to ON (step S1912), sets a B1 display time counter for displaying the previous 60,000 ball base B1 on the performance display monitor 43 for a predetermined time (step S1913), and The display control process ends.

<Step S1914>
When the value of the BL display time counter after the subtraction is not 0 (step S1909: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S1914). When the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S1914: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1915, and when the performance display switch 44 is not switched from on to off (step S1914: No), The display control process ends. When the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S1914: Yes), the performance display monitor 43 displays the current base BL by turning off the power to the 7-segment indicators 431 to 434. And the numbers are turned off.

<Steps S1915 and S1916>
When the performance display switch 44 is switched from ON to OFF (step S1914: YES), the MPU 41 sets the BL display flag to OFF (step S1915), and clears the value of the BL display time counter to 0 (step S1914). S1916), the display control process is terminated.

<Steps S1917 and S1918>
When the B1 display flag is set to ON (step S1902: YES), as shown in FIG. 26, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the B1 display time counter set in step S1913 of FIG. In step S1917, it is determined whether the value of the B1 display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1918). When the value of the B1 display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1918: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1919, and when the value of the B1 display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S1918: No) ), And the process proceeds to step S1923.

<Steps S1919 to S1922>
When the value of the B1 display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1918: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the B1 display flag off (step S1919), and the base stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 The 60,000-ball base B2 included in the information is displayed on the performance display monitor 43 (step S1920). For example, when the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is the example shown in FIG. 23A, “8.”, “2” indicating that the 60,000 base B2 is 32% the previous time. ”,“ 3 ”,“ 2 ”are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43, and the base information is an example shown in FIG. “8.”, “2”, “3”, and “3” indicating that the base B2 is 33% are displayed on the four 7-segment indicators 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43. Then, the MPU 41 sets the B2 display flag to ON (step S1921), and sets a B2 display time counter corresponding to a predetermined time for displaying the 60,000 ball base B2 on the performance display monitor 43 the previous time (step S1922). Then, the display control process ends.

<Step S1923>
When the value of the B1 display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S1918: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S1923). When the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S1923: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1924, and when the performance display switch 44 is not switched from on to off (step S1923: No), The display control process ends. When the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S1923: Yes), the performance display monitor 43 cuts off the power to the 7-segment display units 431 to 434, and the previous 60,000 ball base B1. The alphabet and numbers indicating are turned off.

<Steps S1924 and S1925>
When the performance display switch 44 is switched from ON to OFF (step S1923: YES), the MPU 41 sets the B1 display flag to OFF (step S1924), and clears the value of the B1 display time counter to 0 (step S1924). In step S1925, the display control process ends.

<Steps S1926 and S1927>
When the B2 display flag is set to ON (step S1903: YES), as shown in FIG. 27, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the B2 display time counter set in step S1922 of FIG. S1926), it is determined whether or not the value of the B2 display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1927). When the value of the B2 display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1927: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1928, and when the value of the B2 display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S1927: No) ), And the process proceeds to step S1932.

<Steps S1928 to S1931>
When the value of the B2 display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1927: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the B2 display flag to OFF (step S1928), and the base stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 The current state base BL included in the information is displayed on the performance display monitor 43 (step S1929). For example, when the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is the example shown in FIG. 23A, the current base BL is 29% indicating “8.”, “L”, “ 2 ”and“ 9 ”are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43, and the base information is the example shown in FIG. 23B, the current base BL is 0%. “8.”, “L”, “0”, and “0” indicating the presence are displayed on the four 7-segment indicators 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43. Then, the MPU 41 sets the BL display flag to ON (step S1930), sets a BL display time counter for displaying the current base BL on the performance display monitor 43 for a certain period of time (step S1931), and performs the display control processing. Exit.

<Step S1932>
When the value of the B2 display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S1927: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S1932). When the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S1932: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1933, and when the performance display switch 44 is not switched from on to off (step S1932: No), The display control process ends. When the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S1932: Yes), the performance display monitor 43 cuts off the power to the 7-segment display units 431 to 434 before the 60,000 ball base B2 The alphabet and numbers indicating are turned off.

<Steps S1933 and S1934>
When the performance display switch 44 is switched from ON to OFF (step S1932: YES), the MPU 41 sets the B2 display flag to OFF (step S1933), and clears the value of the B2 display time counter to 0 (step S1932). S1934), the display control process is terminated.

[Processing of voice lamp control device 5]
Next, processing executed by the MPU 51 in the sound lamp control device 5 will be described with reference to FIGS. 28 to 47. However, FIG. 47 is a diagram for explaining a modification of the present embodiment.

  In addition, it is also conceivable as another embodiment that part or all of the processing executed by the MPU 51 of the sound lamp control device 5 in this embodiment is executed by the MPU 61 of the display control device 6. In the sound lamp control device 5, the MPU 51 also executes control processing for the speaker 26 and the illumination unit 27, start-up processing at the time of start-up of the sound lamp control device 5, NMI interruption processing at the time of power failure, etc. Description of these processes is omitted.

[Sub timer interrupt processing of the voice lamp control device 5]
Here, FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the sub timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 51 of the sound lamp control device 5. For example, the MPU 51 executes the sub timer interrupt process as a periodic process with a period of 1 msec.

  As shown in FIG. 28, the MPU 51 performs counter update processing (step S2001), command determination processing (step S2002), operation detection processing (step S2003), jackpot game effect processing (step S2004), and sub timer interruption processing. A standby state process (step S2005) is executed.

[Counter update processing]
In the counter update process (step S2001), the MPU 51 updates the first stop symbol type counter, the effect pattern type counter, the expected event selection counter, the variation display counter, and the like. Specifically, the MPU 51 adds 1 to the counter values in the first stop symbol type counter, the effect type counter, and the expected event selection counter, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, the MPU 51 sets the counter value to 0. To clear. The first stop symbol type counter updated here is used to determine the type of ornament symbol to be stopped first based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 4. For example, the first stop symbol type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0-99. The effect pattern type counter is used to determine the effect type (effect pattern) based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 4. For example, the effect type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0 and 109. Further, the expected event selection counter is used to determine an expected event type to be expected by the player among events that may occur in the execution of the game. For example, the expected event selection counter is a loop counter that loops between 0-49. On the other hand, the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the fluctuation display counter. This variation display counter is for measuring the variation display time of the symbol display unit 341, and the counter value in the variation display counter is set to 0 when the remaining variation display time becomes zero. Therefore, based on the counter value of the fluctuation display counter, it is possible to grasp the remaining fluctuation display time, that the fluctuation is being performed, that the fluctuation display of the symbol display unit 341 has ended, and the like.

[Command judgment processing]
In the command determination process (step S2002), a command received from the main control device 4 is determined, and a process corresponding to the command is executed. Here, FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the command determination process executed in step S2002 in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG.

<Step S2101>
As shown in FIG. 29, in step S <b> 2101, the MPU 51 determines whether a command has been received from the main control device 4. If the MPU 51 receives a command (step S2101: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2102. On the other hand, when the MPU 51 has not received a command (step S2101: No), the command determination process ends. The command received from the main controller 4 is stored in the unprocessed command storage area of the RAM 512, and the MPU 51 determines whether or not a command has been received by referring to the unprocessed command storage area. It should be noted that the command stored in the unprocessed command storage area is determined to have received the command in step S2101 and is erased from the unprocessed command storage area when it becomes a processing target. For example, the command is stored in the processing work storage area. Remembered.

<Step S2102>
In step S2102, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a variation pattern command. If the MPU 51 is a variation pattern command (step S2102: YES), the process proceeds to step S2103. If the command is not a variation pattern command (step S2102: NO), the process proceeds to step S2106.

<Step S2103>
In step S <b> 2103, the MPU 51 determines a variation pattern (decorative symbol stop symbol combination and effect type (effect pattern)) based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 4. Specifically, the MPU 51 includes a variation pattern command, a first stop symbol selection table (see FIGS. 30A and 30B), a variation type table (see FIG. 31), and an effect stored in advance in the ROM 511. The variation pattern is determined based on the pattern type selection table (see FIGS. 32 to 34) and the values of the first stop symbol type counter and the effect type counter stored in the RAM 512. Further, when the variation pattern command includes information on the jackpot type as in the present embodiment, the MPU 51 sets the jackpot flag corresponding to the jackpot type to ON. Specifically, the MPU 51 sets the 5R normal jackpot flag to ON when the jackpot type is 5R normal jackpot, sets the 5R probability jackpot flag to ON when the jackpot type is 5R probability jackpot, and sets the jackpot type Is 16R probability variation jackpot, the 16R probability variation jackpot flag is set to ON.

  The stop symbol combination of the decorative symbols includes a first stop symbol, a second stop symbol, and a final stop symbol. The first stop symbol is a decorative symbol that is first stopped and displayed in the symbol display unit 341, the second stop symbol is a decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed second, and the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed last. It is a design. The effect type table includes a normal reach effect pattern type selection table (see FIG. 32) corresponding to normal reach, a super reach effect pattern type selection table (see FIG. 33) corresponding to super reach, and a special reach effect pattern type corresponding to special reach. A selection table (see FIG. 34) is included.

  Here, FIG. 30A is a diagram illustrating an example of a first stop symbol selection table with promotion that is referred to by the MPU 51 when the promotion effect is executed, and FIG. 30B is a case where the promotion effect is not executed. It is a figure which shows an example of the 1st stop symbol selection table without a promotion referred by MPU51. That is, the first stop symbol selection table referred to when determining the stop symbol combination of the decorative symbols is different depending on whether the promotion effect is executed or not.

  Promotional directs indicate that if the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the player is more advantageous to the player than the suggested jackpot after suggesting that the jackpot is more disadvantageous to the player than the actual lottery result. It is an effect that clearly indicates the lottery result. Specifically, the promotion effect includes a promising promotion effect from a normal jackpot (5R normal jackpot) to a probable jackpot (5R probable jackpot or 16R probable jackpot), and a round number promotion effect from 5R probable jackpot to 16R probable jackpot. Including. In addition, the execution timing of the promotion effect is, for example, at the end of the variable game or during the jackpot game. In the present embodiment, the promotion effect is an effect that suggests that it is a 5R normal jackpot in the variable game (stop display of the double eyes other than the decorative symbols “333” and “777” on the symbol display unit 341). After execution, a probability change promotion effect that clearly indicates that the game is a 5R probability change jackpot or 16R jackpot game in the jackpot game, and an effect that suggests that the game is a 5R probability change jackpot in the variable game ("333" of the decorative symbol on the symbol display unit 341) After the execution of the “stopping display of the double eye”, the round number promotion effect that clearly indicates that it is a 16R jackpot game is executed in the jackpot game. In the present embodiment, it is not specified that the promotion effect is executed at the end of the variable game, but the promotion effect may be executed at the end of the variable game.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a prediction target in an event prediction game that causes a player to predict an event that can occur during the progress of a game in a predetermined period described later is a predetermined target (in this embodiment, “a jackpot type” (FIG. 46 ( In the case of A) see)), execution of the promotion effect is restricted. That is, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a probabilistic jackpot, since the execution of the promotion effect is restricted when the specific target is a predetermined target, the first stop symbol selection without promotion shown in FIG. Since the first stop symbol is determined with reference to the table and the execution of the promotion effect is not restricted when the specific target is not the predetermined target, refer to the first stop symbol selection table with promotion shown in FIG. Thus, the first stop symbol is determined.

  Further, the predetermined object is, for example, a jackpot type as described above (see FIG. 46A). When the jackpot type is predicted, it is suggested that the game is usually a big jackpot in the variable game, and when the probability variation promotion effect is executed in the jackpot game, two correct answers that are contradictory in the variable game and the jackpot game are presented. When the promotion effect is executed, since the true correct answer is a probable jackpot, there is no penalty for a player who expects a probable jackpot. On the other hand, a player who normally expects a big jackpot will recognize that the expectation is correct in floating games, but the expectation that the promotion effect will be executed in the jackpot game will be changed to an incorrect answer. You will suffer. Therefore, if the prediction target is to predict the next jackpot type, the promotion effect is restricted to prevent two contradictory correct answers from being presented in the variable game and the jackpot game. Can be prevented from suffering disadvantages.

  In addition to the jackpot type, the prediction target in the event prediction game is, for example, a combination of decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed on the symbol display unit 341 in a variable game that reports a jackpot, or a lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot Whether or not the variation display for the variation game is a non-normal display different from the normal display (whether there is a pending change), and the final individual variation game effect type ( (Variable game effect type), and the number of times of variable game from the previous normal jackpot to the next jackpot (see FIG. 46A).

  In the event prediction game, a payout (the number of virtual coins) is set for each prediction target (see FIG. 46B). Further, in the event prediction game, the control target segments A to G can be selected from the segments A to G of the seven segment display unit 39 that clearly or suggests the game setting value, and the control target segments A to G are in a specific color. Whether it is turned on or off can be confirmed.

  As shown in FIG. 30A, in the first stop symbol selection table with promotion that is referred to by the MPU 51 when executing the promotion effect, the decorative symbol (first stop symbol) that is first stopped and displayed on the symbol display unit 341. Is stipulated. In FIG. 30A, the decorative symbols are “1” to “9”, and “333” is a symbol combination indicating that the probability variation jackpot (either 5R probability variation jackpot or 16R probability variation jackpot) is “777”. ”Is a symbol combination indicating that it is a 16R probability variation jackpot, and a symbol combination other than“ 333 ”and“ 777 ”is a symbol combination indicating that any of the 5R normal jackpot, 5R probability variation jackpot, and 16R probability variation jackpot It is assumed.

  When the lottery result is “5R normal jackpot”, there is no distribution of “3” and “7” as the first stop symbol, and the first stop symbol with a predetermined probability from the decorative symbols other than “3” and “7” It is determined. That is, when the lottery result is “5R normal jackpot”, the symbol combination “333” or “777” indicating 5R probability variation jackpot or 16R probability variation jackpot (probability variation jackpot) is not stopped and displayed. ”And the numbers other than“ 777 ”are stopped and displayed.

  In addition, when the lottery result is “5R probability variation big hit”, there is no distribution of “7” as the first stop symbol, and the first stop symbol is determined with a predetermined probability from the decorative symbols other than “7”. That is, when the lottery result is “5R probability variation jackpot”, the symbol combination “777” indicating that it is 16R probability variation jackpot is not stopped and displayed. On the other hand, even if the lottery result is “5R probability variation jackpot”, symbol combinations other than “333” symbol combination indicating 5R probability variation jackpot can be stopped and displayed. That is, even if the lottery result is “5R probability variation jackpot”, the symbol combination other than “333” symbol combination indicating that the decorative symbol stop display result indicates 5R normal jackpot can be stopped and displayed. When the lottery result is “5R probability variation jackpot”, if a decorative symbol other than “3” except “7” is determined as the first stop symbol, an object to be predicted in an event prediction game by a player described later Except for the case where is a jackpot type, the MPU 51 executes a 5R probability change promotion effect that clearly indicates that it is a 5R probability change jackpot in the jackpot game.

  Furthermore, when the lottery result is “16-probable big hit”, there is a distribution for all the decorative symbols “1” to “9”, and the first stop is made with a predetermined probability from the decorative symbols “1” to “9”. The symbol is determined. That is, even if the lottery result is “16R probability variation big hit”, symbol combinations other than “777” that indicate 16R probability variation big hit can be stopped and displayed. That is, even if the lottery result is “16R probability variation jackpot”, the symbol combination other than “777” symbol combination indicating that the decorative symbol stop display result indicates 5R probability variation jackpot or 5R normal jackpot is stopped. Can be done. When the lottery result is “16R probability variation jackpot”, when “7” is determined as the first stop symbol, except when the target of the event prediction game by the player described later is a jackpot type The MPU 51 executes a 16R promotion effect that clearly indicates that it is a 16R probability variation jackpot in the jackpot game.

  Then, when the MPU 51 determines the first stop symbol when the lottery result is a big hit, the MPU 51 determines the second stop symbol and the final stop symbol to be the same as the first stop symbol determined previously. As a result, a combination of stop symbols to be stopped and displayed on the active line of the symbol display unit 341 in the game time is determined.

  On the other hand, when the lottery result is “out”, there is a distribution to all the decorative symbols “1” to “9”, and the first stop symbol is determined with a predetermined probability from the decorative symbols “1” to “9”. Is done. Then, when the MPU 51 determines the first stop symbol when the lottery result is “displacement”, the MPU 51 selects the disengagement type selected based on the disengagement variation table (see FIG. 9C) and the first determined previously. A second stop symbol is determined based on the stop symbol. For example, when the detachment type is front / rear detach reach, the second stop symbol is determined as the same symbol as the first stop symbol, and the final stop symbol is determined as the symbol before and after the first stop symbol. Further, when the detachment type is reach other than front / rear detachment, the second stop symbol is determined to be the same as the first stop symbol, and the final stop symbol is different from the first stop symbol and the symbols before and after the first stop symbol. It is determined by the design. When the detachment type is complete detachment, the second stop symbol is determined to be different from the first stop symbol, and the final stop symbol is determined regardless of the first stop symbol and the second stop symbol. It should be noted that the stop symbol combination of the decorative symbols may be determined by the display control device 6, only the first stop symbol is determined by the sound lamp control device 5, and the second stop symbol and the final stop symbol are determined by the display control device 6. You may decide.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 30B, in the first stop symbol selection table without promotion referred to by the MPU 51 when the promotion effect is not executed, the first stop symbol with promotion when the lottery result is “5R normal jackpot”. Similar to the selection table (see FIG. 30A), there is no sorting of “3” and “7” as the first stop symbol, and the first probability is determined with a predetermined probability from decorative symbols other than “3” and “7”. One stop symbol is determined. Further, when the lottery result is “5R probability variation big hit”, the distribution of “3” is 100% as the first stop symbol, and when the lottery result is “16R probability variation big hit”, the distribution of “7” is 100 as the first stop symbol. %. Therefore, when the lottery result is “5R-probable big jackpot”, the symbol combination “333” clearly indicating that it is a 5R-probable big jackpot will always be stopped, and when the lottery result is “16R-probable big jackpot” The symbol combination “777” that clearly indicates that it is always displayed in a stopped state, and the promotion effect is not executed in the jackpot game when it is a probable jackpot.

  FIG. 31 is a diagram illustrating an example of a variation type table. As shown in FIG. 31, in the variation type table, the contents of the variation display time and variation type (effect pattern) corresponding to the variation pattern command are defined. For example, a variation display command “A01” having a lottery result “normal jackpot” and a variation pattern “01” is associated with a variation display time “30 s” and a variation type “normal reach effect pattern”. The variation pattern command “B02” whose lottery result is “5R probability variation jackpot” and variation pattern is “02” is associated with the variation display time “60 s” and the variation type “super reach production pattern”. The variation display command “C03” having the lottery result “16R probability variation big hit” and the variation pattern “03” is associated with the variation display time “90 s” and the variation type “special reach effect pattern”. Further, the variation display command “D04” having the lottery result “out” and the variation pattern “04” is associated with the variation display time “7 s” and the variation type “non-reach effect pattern”. The variation display command “D05” whose result is “out” and the variation pattern is “05” is associated with the variation display time “10 s” and the variation type “non-reach effect pattern”.

  Further, FIGS. 32 to 34 are diagrams showing an example of the effect pattern type selection table. The effect pattern type selection table is set for each variation type (effect pattern). Specifically, FIG. 32 is a normal reach effect pattern type selection table that is referred to when the final individual variable game effect type in the variable game effect is a normal reach effect, and FIG. 33 is the final individual variable game effect in the variable game effect. FIG. 34 is a super reach effect pattern type selection table that is referred to when the type is a super reach effect, and FIG. 34 is a special reach effect that is referred to when the final individual variable game effect type in the variable game effect is a special reach effect. It is a pattern type selection table.

  In this embodiment, a case where there are five types of effects corresponding to each variation type will be described as an example, but there may be six or more types of effects. Also, in FIGS. 32 to 34, the effect type table when the variation type is “no reach” is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 32, as the normal reach production pattern type selection table, the big hit normal reach production pattern type selection table (5R normal big hit normal reach depending on the lottery results (5R normal big hit, 5R probability big hit, 16R probability big hit, and out). Production pattern type selection table (see FIG. 32A), 5R probability variation big hit normal reach production pattern type selection table (see FIG. 32B), 16R probability variation big hit normal reach production pattern type selection table (see FIG. 32C)) And a normal reach effect pattern type selection table (see FIG. 32D). In each normal reach production pattern type selection table, production pattern types are defined for each of the game modes A to C. In the jackpot normal reach production, “production pattern X1” to “production pattern X11” are defined. On the other hand, in the deviating normal reach effect, “effect pattern X1” to “effect pattern X4”, “effect pattern X6”, “effect pattern X7”, “effect pattern X9” and “effect pattern X10” are defined.

  Here, the game modes A to C in FIG. 32 define the effect pattern types executed as the variable game effects, and can be selected by the player as described later (see FIG. 51). In other words, each game mode has different effect pattern types executed in the variable game, and the player can select a game mode according to the taste.

  As shown in FIGS. 32 (A) to 32 (C), in the jackpot normal reach effect pattern type selection table, “effect pattern X1” and “effect pattern X2” are common effects common to all game modes A to C. It is a pattern and can be selected in all game modes A to C. In the jackpot normal reach effect pattern type selection table, “effect pattern X3” to “effect pattern X5” are unique effect patterns that can be executed only in game mode A, and “effect pattern X6” to “effect pattern X8” are games. These are unique effect patterns that can be executed only in mode B, and “effect pattern X9” to “effect pattern X11” are unique effect patterns that can be executed only in game mode C. That is, in the jackpot normal reach effect pattern type selection table, any one of “effect pattern X1” to “effect pattern X5” is selected in the game mode A according to the counter value of the effect pattern type counter. In this case, “effect pattern X1”, “effect pattern X2”, “effect pattern X6” to “effect pattern X8” are selected, and in the case of the game mode C, “effect pattern X1”, “effect pattern X2”, Any one of “effect pattern X9” to “effect pattern X11” is selected. Here, the effect pattern X1 to the effect pattern X11 included in the normal reach effect pattern type selection table are effects in which a normal reach effect in which the decorative symbol is in a reach state after the high-speed variable effect in which the decorative symbol is changed at high speed is executed, for example. The final individual variable game effect type is an effect that becomes a normal reach effect.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 32D, in the outlier normal reach effect pattern type selection table, “effect pattern X1” and “effect pattern X2” are common effect patterns common to all the game modes A to C. All game modes A to C can be selected. Also, in the outlier normal reach effect pattern type selection table, “effect pattern X3” and “effect pattern X4” are unique effect patterns that can be executed only in game mode A, and “effect pattern X6” and “effect pattern X7” are games. The “effect pattern X9” and the “effect pattern X10” are unique effect patterns that can be executed only in the game mode C. That is, in the out-of-normal reach effect pattern type selection table, one of “effect pattern X1” to “effect pattern X4” is selected in the game mode A according to the counter value of the effect pattern type counter, and the game mode B In this case, one of “effect pattern X1”, “effect pattern X2”, “effect pattern X6” and “effect pattern X7” is selected, and in the case of the game mode C, “effect pattern X1”, “effect pattern X2”, Either “effect pattern X9” or “effect pattern X10” is selected.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 33, as the super reach production pattern type selection table, the jackpot super reach production pattern type selection table (in accordance with the lottery results (5R normal jackpot, 5R probability variation jackpot, 16R probability variation jackpot and miss) 5R normal jackpot super reach effect pattern type selection table (see FIG. 33A), 5R probability variable jackpot super reach effect pattern type selection table (see FIG. 33B), 16R probability change jackpot super reach effect pattern type selection table (see FIG. 33) 33 (C))), and a non-super reach effect pattern type selection table (see FIG. 33 (D)). In each super reach production pattern type selection table, production pattern types are defined for each of the game modes A to C, and “production pattern Y1” to “production pattern Y11” are defined.

  As shown in FIGS. 33 (A) to 33 (D), in each super reach effect pattern type selection table, “effect pattern Y1” and “effect pattern Y2” are common to all game modes A to C. It is an effect pattern and can be selected in all game modes A to C. In each super reach production pattern type selection table, “production pattern Y3” to “production pattern Y5” are unique production patterns that can be executed only in game mode A, and “production pattern Y6” to “production pattern Y8” are These are unique effect patterns that can be executed only in the game mode B, and “effect patterns Y9” to “effect pattern Y11” are unique effect patterns that can be executed only in the game mode C. That is, in the super reach effect pattern type selection table, one of “effect pattern Y1” to “effect pattern Y5” is selected in the game mode A according to the counter value of the effect pattern type counter, and the game mode B In this case, “effect pattern Y1”, “effect pattern Y2”, “effect pattern Y6” to “effect pattern Y8” are selected, and in the case of the game mode C, “effect pattern Y1”, “effect pattern Y2”, Any one of “effect pattern Y9” to “effect pattern Y11” is selected. Here, for the effect patterns Y1 to Y11 included in the super reach effect pattern type selection table, for example, the normal reach effect is executed after the end of the high-speed variable effect, and further, the final individual variable game effect type is expected to be a bigger hit than the normal reach effect It is a production that develops into a super reach production that has a higher degree of execution time than the normal reach production. In addition, the super reach production pattern type selection table may include a super reach production pattern that develops into a super reach production after the high-speed fluctuation production is completed without going through the normal reach production.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 34, as the special reach production pattern type selection table, the big hit special reach production pattern type selection table (in accordance with the lottery results (5R normal jackpot, 5R probability variation jackpot, 16R probability variation jackpot, and off) 5R normal jackpot special reach performance pattern type selection table (see FIG. 34A), 5R probability variation jackpot special reach performance pattern type selection table (see FIG. 34B), 16R probability variation jackpot special reach performance pattern type selection table (FIG. 34) 34 (see (C))) and a special outreach effect pattern type selection table (see FIG. 34 (D)). In each special reach production pattern type selection table, production pattern types are defined for each of the game modes A to C, and “production patterns Z1” to “production patterns Z11” are defined.

  As shown in FIGS. 34A to 34D, in each special reach effect pattern type selection table, “effect pattern Z1” and “effect pattern Z2” are common to all game modes A to C. It is an effect pattern and can be selected in all game modes A to C. In each special reach production pattern type selection table, “production pattern Z3” to “production pattern Z5” are unique production patterns that can be executed only in the game mode A, and “production pattern Z6” to “production pattern Z8” are These are unique effect patterns that can be executed only in the game mode B, and “effect patterns Z9” to “effect pattern Z11” are unique effect patterns that can be executed only in the game mode C. That is, in the special reach effect pattern type selection table, any one of “effect pattern Z1” to “effect pattern Z5” is selected in the game mode A according to the counter value of the effect pattern type counter, and the game mode B In this case, “effect pattern Z1”, “effect pattern Z2”, “effect pattern Z6” to “effect pattern Z8” are selected, and in the case of the game mode C, “effect pattern Z1”, “effect pattern Z2”, Any one of “effect pattern Z9” to “effect pattern Z11” is selected. Here, for the effect patterns Z1 to Z11 included in the special reach effect pattern type selection table, for example, the normal reach effect and the super reach effect are executed after the high-speed variable effect ends, and the normal reach effect as the final individual variable game effect type. This is an effect that develops into a special reach production that has a higher expectation of jackpot than a super reach production and has a longer production execution time than a normal reach production. The special reach production pattern type selection table includes a special reach production pattern that develops into a special reach production after the completion of the high-speed fluctuation production or the normal reach production without passing through at least one of the normal reach production and the super reach production. May be.

  Then, the MPU 51 stores, in the RAM 512, a display variation pattern command indicating a decoration pattern stop symbol combination determined based on the variation pattern command, the variation type table, the effect type table, and the effect type counter, and the variation type (effect pattern type). Set.

<Step S2104>
Returning to the description of FIG. 29, in step S2104, the MPU 51 sets the fluctuation display time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern command in the fluctuation display counter. The variation display time is determined according to variation pattern information included in the variation pattern command. Then, the fluctuation display counter is decremented by 1 in the counter update process of step S2001 in the sub timer interruption process of FIG. 28, and the MPU 51 determines whether or not the symbol fluctuation display is being performed based on the fluctuation display counter. It is possible to determine the remaining display time. For example, the MPU 51 can determine that the symbol variation display has ended when the variation display counter reaches zero.

<Step S2105>
In step S <b> 2105, the MPU 51 outputs to the display control device 6 a display variation pattern command for specifying the decorative symbol stop symbol combination in the symbol display unit 341 and the content of the variation type (effect pattern type). The display variation pattern command is information for identifying the stop symbol combination of the decorative symbol determined in step S2103 and the variation type (effect pattern type). On the other hand, the ROM 611 of the display control device 6 stores a decorative image variation image and an effect image corresponding to each display variation pattern command. Thereby, in the display control device 6, the MPU 61 executes the variation display and the effect display in the symbol display unit 341 according to the stop symbol combination, the variation type and the effect type of the decorative symbol corresponding to the display variation pattern command.

  Specifically, in the symbol display unit 341, the MPU 61 of the display control device 6 executes a variable display of a plurality of decorative symbols (for example, three) until a preset variable display time elapses. The decorative pattern changes are displayed in order. During decorative pattern variation display, various effects corresponding to the content of the variation type (effect pattern type) specified by the display variation pattern command are executed by the symbol display unit 341, the speaker 26, the electrical decoration unit 27, and the like. . Then, when the MPU 51 outputs the display variation pattern command to the display control device 6, the MPU 51 sets the variation game effect flag indicating that the variation game effect is being executed to ON. It should be noted that the variable game effect in-progress flag is referred to in order to determine whether or not the variable game and the big hit game are in a standby state in step S2901 of the standby state process of FIG. The variable game effect flag is set off when the variable display counter is zero and the variable game effect is ended.

<Step S2106>
In step S2106, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the received command is a jackpot game start command. The jackpot game start command is a command indicating that the jackpot game is started, and is set when the jackpot game execution flag is set to ON at the start of the jackpot game by the MPU 41 of the main controller 4 as described above. Here, if the received command is a jackpot game start command (step S2106: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2107, and if the received command is not a jackpot game start command (step S2106: No), the process is performed. Goes to step S2108.

<Step S2107>
When the jackpot game start command is received (step S2106: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the jackpot game effect start flag to ON (step S2107). The jackpot game effect start flag is a flag for starting the jackpot game effect (opening effect). Whether or not the jackpot game effect is determined and executed in the jackpot game effect process of step S2005 in the sub timer interruption process of FIG. It is referred to when judging.

<Step S2108>
In step S2108, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the received command is a round game start command. The round game start command is a command indicating that a round game in the opening / closing execution mode is started, and is set when a round game is started in the jackpot game control process of step S1305 in the main process of FIG. Here, if the received command is a round game start command (step S2108: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2109, and if the received command is not a round game start command (step S2108: No), the process The process proceeds to step S2110.

<Step S2109>
When the round game start command is received (step S2108: YES), the MPU 51 sets the round game effect start flag to ON (step S2109). The round game start flag is referred to when determining whether or not to start a round game effect in the jackpot game effect in step S2005 in the sub timer interruption process of FIG.

<Step S2110>
In step S2110, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the received command is a round game end command. The round game end command is a command indicating that the round game in the open / close execution mode is to be ended, and is set when the round game is ended in the jackpot game control process of step S1305 in the main process of FIG. Here, when the received command is a round game end command (step S2110: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2111. When the received command is not a round game end command (step S2110: No), the processing is performed. The process proceeds to step S2112.

<Step S2111>
When the round game end command is received (step S2110: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the round game effect end flag to ON (step S2111). The round game end flag is referred to when determining whether or not to end the round game effect in the jackpot game effect in step S2005 in the sub timer interruption process of FIG.

<Step S2112>
In step S2112, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the received command is an ending start command. The ending start command is a command indicating that the ending in the jackpot game is started, and is set in the jackpot game control process of step S1305 in the main process of FIG. Here, when the received command is an ending start command (step S2112: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2113, and when the received command is not an ending start command (step S2112: No), the process is performed. The process moves to S2114.

<Step S2113>
When the ending start command is received (step S2112: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the ending start effect flag to ON (step S2113). The ending effect start flag is referred to when determining whether or not to start the ending effect process in the jackpot game effect process of step S2005 in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG.

<Step S2114>
In step S2114, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the received command is a jackpot game end command. The jackpot game end command is a command indicating that the jackpot game is to be ended, and is set in the jackpot game control process of step S1305 in the main process of FIG. Here, when the received command is a jackpot game end command (step S2114: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2115, and when the received command is not a jackpot game end command (step S2114: No), processing is performed. The process proceeds to step S2116.

<Step S2115>
When the jackpot game end command is received (step S2114: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the jackpot game effect end flag to ON (step S2115). The jackpot game effect end flag is a flag for ending the jackpot game effect (ending effect), and is referred to when determining whether or not to end the ending effect in step S2516 in the jackpot game effect process of FIG. .

<Step S2116>
In step S2116, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a pending command. The hold command is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 of the lottery result in the jackpot lottery with respect to the hold increased when the hold number N or the hold number M increases, and in the first hold command setting process of FIG. It is set in step S1207 or step S1209. If the received command is a pending command (step S2116: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2117. If the received command is not a pending command (step S2116: No), the process proceeds to step S2118. Transition.

<Step S2117>
When the hold command is received (step S2116: Yes), the MPU 51 stores the content of the hold command in the RAM 512.

<Step S2118>
In step S2118, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the received command is a game setting value change command. The game setting value change command is a command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 that the game setting value has been changed and the changed game setting value, and is set in step S1710 in the game setting value changing process of FIG. Is done. Here, when the received command is a game setting value change command (step S2118: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2119, and when the received command is not a game setting value change command (step S2118: No). Then, the process proceeds to step S2120 in FIG.

<Step S2119>
When the game setting value change command is received (step S2118: Yes), the MPU 51 changes the game setting value stored in the RAM 512 to the changed game setting value included in the game setting value change command and stores it ( Step S2119). Note that the game setting values stored in the RAM 512 are read out in step S2807 in the 2R round game effect determination process of FIG. 43 described later, and are displayed on the symbol display unit 341 in the opening / closing execution mode and 7 Reference is made to determine the lighting / extinguishing mode of the segment display unit 39.

<Step S2120>
In step S2120, the MPU 51 terminates the command determination process after executing a process based on another command received from the main control device 4.

[Operation detection processing]
Returning to the description of FIG. 28, the MPU 41 executes an operation detection process for detecting whether or not an operation has been performed on the various buttons 20, 21A, and 21B (step S2003). Here, FIG. 35 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the operation detection process.

  As shown in FIG. 35, in the operation detection process, the MPU 41 performs an operation button operation detection process (step S2201), an operation detection pattern determination process (step S2202), a selection button operation detection process (step S2203), and a selection operation detection pattern determination. Processing (step S2204), determination button operation detection processing (step S2205), and determination operation detection pattern determination processing (step S2206) are executed.

[Operation button operation detection processing]
In the operation button operation detection process (step S2201 of the operation detection process), an operation state of the operation button 20 is detected, and a process for sequentially updating the operation history for the past three times is executed. In the gaming machine 10, when the operation button operation detection process is executed by the MPU 41, the operation button 20 is operated at a predetermined interval (1 msec interval in the present embodiment) corresponding to the interrupt period of the sub timer interrupt process. The presence or absence of is determined. FIG. 36 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the operation button operation detection process in step S2201 in the operation detection process of FIG. Hereinafter, the operation button operation detection process will be described with reference to FIG.

<Steps S2301 to S2303>
As shown in FIG. 36, in step S2301, the MPU 41 shifts (overwrites) the setting of the second detection flag to the first detection flag. In step S2302, the MPU 41 shifts (overwrites) the setting of the third detection flag to the second detection flag. Thereafter, in step S2303, the MPU 41 sets (overwrites) the operation state of the operation button 20 detected by the operation switch 20a in the third detection flag, and the operation detection process ends.

  As described above, in the operation button operation detection process, the processes of steps S2301 to S2303 are executed, so that the operation state of the last three operations at the 1 msec interval as the operation history of the operation button 20 is the first detection flag to the third detection. It is stored in the RAM 512 as a flag. Specifically, the most recent operation state is stored as the third detection flag, the previous operation state is stored as the second detection flag, and the two previous operation states are stored as the first detection flag.

[Operation detection pattern judgment processing]
Returning to the description of FIG. 35, in the operation detection pattern determination process of step S2202 in the operation detection process, the operation of the operation button 20 determined based on the first operation detection flag, the second operation detection flag, and the third operation detection flag. An operation pattern flag for determining an operation state for the operation button 20 from the history is set. The operation pattern flag includes first to third operation pattern flags, and the operation state of the operation button 20 can be determined by a combination of ON and OFF of the first to third operation pattern flags. For example, when only the first operation pattern flag is set to ON, it can be determined that the operation on the operation button 20 is continued (see FIG. 38A). If only the second operation pattern flag is set to ON, it can be determined that the operation on the operation button 20 has been started (see FIG. 38A). If only the third operation pattern flag is set to ON, it can be determined that the operation on the operation button 20 has ended (see FIG. 38A). And when all the 1st-3rd operation pattern flags are set to OFF, it can determine with operation with respect to the operation button 20 not being made (refer FIG. 38 (A)). Here, FIG. 37 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the operation detection pattern determination process. FIG. 38A is a table showing the relationship between the detection pattern for the operation button 20 and the operation status. Hereinafter, the operation button operation detection process will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 and 38A.

<Step S2401>
As shown in FIG. 37, in step S2401, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the first operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the operation button 20 three times before is set to ON. Here, if the first operation detection flag is on (step S2401: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2402, and if the first operation detection flag is off (step S2401: No), performs the process. The process proceeds to step S2405.

<Step S2402>
In step S2402, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the second operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the operation button 20 two times before is set to ON. Here, when the second operation detection flag is on (step S2402: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2403, and when the second operation detection flag is off (step S2402: No), the process is performed. The process moves to step S2408.

<Step S2403>
In step S2403, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the third operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the most recent operation button 20 is set to ON. Here, when the third operation detection flag is on (step S2403: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2404, and when the third operation detection flag is off (step S2403: No), the process is performed. The process moves to step S2410.

<Step S2404>
In step S2404, the MPU 41 sets the first operation pattern flag on, sets the second operation pattern flag and the third operation pattern flag off, and ends the operation detection pattern determination process. That is, the MPU 41 sets the first operation pattern flag to ON when the operation pattern of “ON”, “ON”, and “ON” is generated as the operation state of the operation button 20 three times, and the second operation pattern The flag and the third operation pattern flag are set to OFF (see FIG. 38A). The first operation pattern flag can be used as an index for determining whether or not the operation state of the operation button 20 is continued. For example, when the first operation pattern flag is set to ON, the MPU 41 may set an operation button operation continuation command in the RAM 412 and transmit this operation button operation continuation command to the sound lamp control device 5. . Thereby, since the sound lamp control device 5 can determine that the operation on the operation button 20 is continued, the operation button 20 is continuously operated based on the number of times that the operation button operation continuation command is continuously transmitted. You can keep track of time. Therefore, since the sound lamp control device 5 can determine whether or not the long press operation has been performed on the operation button 20 based on the time during which the operation button 20 is continuously operated, the operation button effect based on the long press operation is determined. Can be executed.

<Step S2405>
When the MPU 41 determines in step S2401 that the first operation detection flag is not on (step S2401: No), it is determined whether or not the second operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the previous operation button 20 is on. Determination is made (step S2405). Here, when the second operation detection flag is on (step S2405: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2406, and when the second operation detection flag is off (step S2405: No), the process is performed. The process moves to step S2410.

<Step S2406>
In step S2406, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the third operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the most recent operation button 20 is on. Here, when the third operation detection flag is on (step S2406: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2407, and when the third operation detection flag is off (step S2406: No), the process is performed. The process moves to step S2410.

<Step S2407>
In step S2407, the MPU 41 sets the second operation pattern flag on, and sets the first operation pattern flag and the third operation pattern flag off. That is, the MPU 41 sets the second operation pattern flag to ON when the operation pattern of “OFF”, “ON”, “ON” is generated as the operation state of the operation button 20 three times, and the first operation pattern The flag and the third operation pattern flag are set to OFF (see FIG. 38A), and the operation detection pattern determination process ends. The second operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the operation button 20 has changed from the non-operation state to the operation state (whether or not the operation button 20 has been started). As described above, if it is determined whether or not the operation button 20 has changed from the non-operation state to the operation state using the second operation pattern flag, the operation state of the operation button 20 three times is reflected. Alternatively, erroneous detection of the operation start of the operation button 20 due to noise such as static electricity is prevented, and the operation start of the operation button 20 is prevented from being reflected in the effect display at a timing not intended by the player.

<Step S2408>
When the MPU 41 determines in step S2402 that the second operation detection flag is not on (step S2402: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the third operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the most recent operation button 20 is on. (Step S2408). Here, if the third operation detection flag is on (step S2408: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2410, and if the second operation detection flag is off (step S2408: No), performs the process. The process moves to step S2409.

<Step S2409>
In step S2409, the MPU 41 sets the third operation pattern flag on, sets the first operation pattern flag and the second operation pattern flag off, and ends the operation detection pattern determination process. That is, the MPU 41 sets the third operation pattern flag to ON when the operation pattern of “ON”, “OFF”, and “OFF” is generated as the operation state of the operation button 20 three times, and the first operation pattern The flag and the second operation pattern flag are set to OFF (see FIG. 38A). The third operation pattern flag can be used as an index for determining whether or not the operation button 20 has changed from the operation state to the non-operation state (whether or not the operation of the operation button 20 has been completed). it can.

<Step S2410>
In step S2410, the MPU 41 sets the first operation pattern flag, the second operation pattern flag, and the third operation pattern flag to OFF, and ends the operation detection pattern determination process. That is, the MPU 41 turns off all the first to third operation pattern flags when an operation pattern other than the above, such as “OFF”, “OFF”, “OFF”, etc., is generated as the operation state of the operation button 20 three times. (See FIG. 38A). The MPU 41 determines that the operation button 20 is in a non-operation state when all of the first to third operation pattern flags are off.

[Select button operation detection processing]
Returning to the description of FIG. 35, in the selection button operation detection process (step S2203), the MPU 41 executes an upper selection button operation process, a lower selection button operation process, a left selection button operation process, and a right selection button operation process.

<Up selection button operation processing>
In the upper selection button operation process, the MPU 41 detects the operation state of the upper selection button 211 and executes a process for sequentially updating the past three operation histories. Here, the upper selection button operation process is the same as the operation button operation detection process of FIG. In the upper selection button operation process, “operation detection flag” may be read as “upper selection operation detection flag” in each step of the operation button operation detection process of FIG.

<Lower selection button operation processing>
In the lower selection button operation process, the MPU 41 detects the operation state of the lower selection button 212 and executes a process for sequentially updating the past three operation histories. Here, since the lower selection button operation process is the same as the operation button operation detection process of FIG. 36, a detailed description thereof will be omitted. It should be noted that the lower selection button operation process may be performed by replacing “operation detection flag” with “lower selection operation detection flag” in each step of the operation button operation detection process of FIG.

<Left selection button operation processing>
In the left selection button operation process, the MPU 41 detects the operation state of the left selection button 213 and executes a process for sequentially updating the past three operation histories. Here, the left selection button operation process is the same as the operation button operation detection process of FIG. In the left selection button operation process, “operation detection flag” may be read as “left selection operation detection flag” in each step of the operation button operation detection process of FIG.

<Right selection button operation processing>
In the right selection button operation process, the MPU 41 detects the operation state of the right selection button 214 and executes a process for sequentially updating the past three operation histories. Here, the right selection button operation process is the same as the operation button operation detection process of FIG. In the right selection button operation process, “operation detection flag” may be read as “right selection operation detection flag” in each step of the operation button operation detection process of FIG.

[Selection operation detection pattern judgment processing]
In the selection operation detection pattern determination process (step S2204), the MPU 41 executes an upper selection operation detection pattern determination process, a lower selection operation detection pattern determination process, a left selection operation detection pattern determination process, and a right selection operation detection pattern determination process.

<Upper selection operation detection pattern determination processing>
In the upper selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 performs an upper operation from the operation history of the upper selection button 211 determined based on the first upper selection operation detection flag, the second upper selection operation detection flag, and the third upper selection operation detection flag. An upper operation pattern flag for determining an operation state with respect to the selection button 211 is set. Here, the upper selection operation detection pattern determination process is the same as the operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. In the upper selection operation detection pattern determination process, in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. 37, the “operation detection flag” is set to “upper selection operation detection flag”, and the “operation pattern flag” is set to “upper selection operation pattern”. It may be read as “flag”.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 38B, in the upper selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 has operation patterns of “ON”, “ON”, and “ON” as the operation states of the upper selection button 211 three times. When it occurs, the first upper selection operation pattern flag is set to ON, and the second upper selection operation pattern flag and the third upper selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The first upper selection operation pattern flag can be used as an index for determining whether or not the operation state of the upper selection button 211 is continued.

  Further, the MPU 41 sets the second upper selection operation pattern flag to ON when an operation pattern of “OFF”, “ON”, “ON” is generated as the operation state of the upper selection button 211 three times, The first selection operation pattern flag and the third selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The second upper selection operation pattern flag is an index for determining whether or not the upper selection button 211 has changed from the non-operation state to the operation state (whether or not the operation of the upper selection button 211 has started). Used.

  Further, the MPU 41 sets the third upper selection operation pattern flag to ON when an operation pattern of “ON”, “OFF”, and “OFF” is generated as the operation state of the upper selection button 211 three times. The first upper selection operation pattern flag and the second upper selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The third upper selection operation pattern flag is an index for determining whether or not the upper selection button 211 has changed from the operation state to the non-operation state (whether or not the operation of the upper selection button 211 has ended). Used.

  The MPU 41 also displays the first to third upper selection operation pattern flags when an operation pattern other than the above, such as “OFF”, “OFF”, and “OFF”, is generated as the operation state of the upper selection button 211 three times. Set all of to off. The MPU 41 determines that the upper selection button 211 is in a non-operation state when all of the first to third upper selection operation pattern flags are off.

<Lower selection operation detection pattern determination process>
In the lower selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 selects the lower selection button from the operation history of the lower selection button 212 determined based on the first lower selection operation detection flag, the second lower selection operation detection flag, and the lower selection operation detection flag. A lower operation pattern flag for determining an operation state for 212 is set. Here, the lower selection operation detection pattern determination process is the same as the operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. 37, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted. It should be noted that the lower selection operation detection pattern determination process includes “operation detection flag” as “lower selection operation detection flag” and “operation pattern flag” as “lower selection operation pattern” in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. It may be read as “flag”.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 38C, in the lower selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 has operation patterns of “ON”, “ON”, and “ON” as the operation states of the lower selection button 212 three times. When it occurs, the first lower selection operation pattern flag is set to ON, and the second lower selection operation pattern flag and the third lower selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The first lower selection operation pattern flag can be used as an index for determining whether or not the operation state of the lower selection button 212 is continued.

  Further, the MPU 41 sets the second lower selection operation pattern flag to ON when the operation pattern of “OFF”, “ON”, “ON” is generated as the operation state of the lower selection button 212 three times, The first lower selection operation pattern flag and the third lower selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The second lower selection operation pattern flag is an index for determining whether or not the lower selection button 212 has changed from the non-operation state to the operation state (whether or not the operation of the lower selection button 212 has started). Used.

  Further, the MPU 41 sets the third lower selection operation pattern flag to ON when an operation pattern of “ON”, “OFF”, and “OFF” occurs as the operation state of the lower selection button 212 three times, The first lower selection operation pattern flag and the second lower selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The third lower selection operation pattern flag is an index for determining whether or not the lower selection button 212 has changed from the operation state to the non-operation state (whether or not the operation of the lower selection button 212 has ended). Used.

  The MPU 41 also detects the first to third lower selection operation detection flags when an operation pattern other than the above, such as “OFF”, “OFF”, “OFF”, etc., is generated as the operation state of the lower selection button 212 three times. Set all of to off. The MPU 41 determines that the lower selection button 212 is in a non-operation state when all of the first to third lower selection operation pattern flags are off.

<Left selection operation detection pattern determination processing>
In the left selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 selects the left selection button from the operation history of the left selection button 213 determined based on the first left selection operation detection flag, the second left selection operation detection flag, and the left selection operation detection flag. A left operation pattern flag for determining an operation state for 213 is set. Here, since the left selection operation detection pattern determination process is the same as the operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. 37, detailed description thereof is omitted. In the left selection operation detection pattern determination process, in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. 37, the “operation detection flag” is set to “left selection operation detection flag”, and the “operation pattern flag” is set to “left selection operation pattern”. It may be read as “flag”.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 38D, in the left selection operation detection pattern determination processing, the MPU 41 has operation patterns of “ON”, “ON”, and “ON” as the operation states of the left selection button 213 three times. If it occurs, the first left selection operation pattern flag is set to ON, and the second left selection operation pattern flag and the third left selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The first left selection operation pattern flag can be used as an index for determining whether or not the operation state of the left selection button 213 is continued.

  Further, the MPU 41 sets the second left selection operation pattern flag to ON when an operation pattern of “OFF”, “ON”, “ON” is generated as the operation state of the left selection button 213 three times, The 1 left selection operation pattern flag and the 3rd left selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The second left selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the left selection button 213 has changed from the non-operation state to the operation state (whether or not the operation of the left selection button 213 has been started). Used.

  Further, the MPU 41 sets the third left selection operation pattern flag to ON when an operation pattern of “ON”, “OFF”, and “OFF” is generated as the operation state of the left selection button 213 three times. The 1 left selection operation pattern flag and the 2nd left selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The third left selection operation pattern flag is an index for determining whether or not the left selection button 213 has changed from the operation state to the non-operation state (whether or not the operation of the left selection button 213 has ended). Used.

  The MPU 41 also displays the first to third left selection operation pattern flags when an operation pattern other than the above, such as “OFF”, “OFF”, and “OFF”, is generated as the operation state of the left selection button 213 three times. Set all of to off. The MPU 41 determines that the left selection button 213 is in a non-operating state when all of the first to third left selection operation pattern flags are off.

<Right selection operation detection pattern determination processing>
In the right selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 selects the right selection button from the operation history of the right selection button 214 determined based on the first right selection operation detection flag, the second right selection operation detection flag, and the right selection operation detection flag. A right operation pattern flag for determining an operation state for 214 is set. Here, since the right selection operation detection pattern determination process is the same as the operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. 37, detailed description thereof is omitted. In the right selection operation detection pattern determination process, the “operation detection flag” is set to “right selection operation detection flag” and the “operation pattern flag” is set to “right selection operation pattern” in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. It may be read as “flag”.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 38E, in the right selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 has “ON”, “ON”, and “ON” operation patterns as the operation states of the right selection button 214 three times. When it occurs, the first right selection operation pattern flag is set to ON, and the second right selection operation pattern flag and the third right selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The first right selection operation pattern flag can be used as an index for determining whether or not the operation state of the right selection button 214 is continued.

  Further, the MPU 41 sets the second right selection operation pattern flag to ON when the operation pattern of “OFF”, “ON”, and “ON” is generated as the operation state of the right selection button 214 three times, The 1 right selection operation pattern flag and the 3rd right selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The second right selection operation pattern flag is an index for determining whether or not the right selection button 214 has changed from the non-operation state to the operation state (whether or not the operation of the right selection button 214 has started). Used.

  Further, the MPU 41 sets the third right selection operation pattern flag to ON when the operation patterns of “ON”, “OFF”, and “OFF” are generated as the operation state of the right selection button 214 three times, The 1 right selection operation pattern flag and the 2nd right selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The third right selection operation pattern flag is an index for determining whether or not the right selection button 214 has changed from the operation state to the non-operation state (whether or not the operation of the right selection button 214 has ended). Used.

  The MPU 41 also displays the first to third right selection operation pattern flags when an operation pattern other than the above, such as “OFF”, “OFF”, and “OFF”, is generated as the operation state of the right selection button 214 three times. Set all of to off. The MPU 41 determines that the right selection button 214 is in a non-operation state when all of the first to third right selection operation pattern flags are off.

[Determination button operation detection processing]
In the determination button operation detection process (step S2205 in FIG. 35), the MPU 41 detects the operation state of the determination button 21B and executes a process for sequentially updating the past three operation histories. Here, the decision button operation detection process is the same as the operation button operation detection process of FIG. In the determination button operation detection process, the “operation detection flag” may be read as the “decision button operation detection flag” in each step of the operation button operation detection process of FIG.

[Determination operation detection pattern judgment processing]
In the determination operation detection pattern determination process (step S2206 in FIG. 35), the MPU 41 determines the operation history of the determination button 21B determined based on the first determination operation detection flag, the second determination operation detection flag, and the third determination operation detection flag. The operation pattern flag for determining the operation state for the determination button 21B is set. Here, the determination operation detection pattern determination process is the same as the operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. In the determination operation detection pattern determination process, “operation detection flag” may be read as “determination operation detection flag” in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process of FIG.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 38 (F), in the determination operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 generates “ON”, “ON”, and “ON” operation patterns as the operation states for three times of the determination button 21B. In this case, the first determination operation pattern flag is set to ON, and the second determination operation pattern flag and the third determination operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The first determination operation pattern flag can be used as an index for determining whether or not the operation state of the determination button 21B is continuing.

  Further, the MPU 41 sets the second determination operation pattern flag to ON when the operation pattern of “OFF”, “ON”, and “ON” is generated as the operation state of the determination button 21B three times, and the first determination is made. The operation pattern flag and the third determination operation pattern flag are set to off. The second determination operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the determination button 21B has changed from the non-operation state to the operation state (whether or not the operation of the determination button 21B has started). .

  Further, the MPU 41 sets the third determination operation pattern flag to ON when the operation pattern of “ON”, “OFF”, and “OFF” is generated as the operation state of the determination button 21B three times, and the first determination is made. The operation pattern flag and the second determination operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The third determination operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the determination button 21B has changed from the operation state to the non-operation state (whether or not the operation of the determination button 21B has ended). .

  Further, the MPU 41 sets all the first to third determination operation pattern flags when an operation pattern other than the above, such as “OFF”, “OFF”, “OFF”, etc., is generated as the operation state of the determination button 21B three times. Set to off. The MPU 41 determines that the determination button 21B is in a non-operation state when all of the first to third determination operation pattern flags are off.

[Big hit game effect processing]
Returning to the description of FIG. 28, in the jackpot game effect process (step S2004) of the sub timer interruption process, the jackpot game effect to be executed in the jackpot game is determined, and the symbol display part 341 or the like is caused to execute the jackpot game effect. Since the jackpot game of the present embodiment includes an opening, an opening / closing execution mode and an ending, an opening effect, an opening / closing execution mode effect and an ending effect are determined as the jackpot game effect. Further, as the jackpot effect, an effect related to the event prediction game is determined. Here, an event prediction game is a game that allows a player to predict an event that may occur during the progress of a game in a predetermined period in the prediction period. It is given. By executing the event prediction game in this way, the player can enjoy whether or not the prediction is correct in the predetermined period. Then, by giving a privilege when the player's prediction is correct, not only an interest in the event prediction game but also an interest in the privilege is added, so that the interest in the game is improved.

  The start of the predetermined period is, for example, after the end of the jackpot game, and is set to (5R) after the end of the normal jackpot and (5R and 16R) after the end of the probabilistic jackpot. In this way, by setting the start of the predetermined period after the end of a specific jackpot game, an event that may occur after the end of the jackpot game becomes a target of prediction. Therefore, by setting the start of a predetermined period after the end of the jackpot game, the execution period of the jackpot game is set to the execution period of the production related to the event prediction game, for example, event prediction, benefit selection, notification of the result for the player's prediction It can be used as a performance execution period. In addition, the start of the predetermined period may be, for example, after the end of the time-saving mode that ends without winning a jackpot. In particular, when the gaming machine 10 is an ST machine or a V-ST machine, it is preferable that the start of the predetermined period is set after the end of the time-saving mode that ends without winning a jackpot.

  On the other hand, the end of the predetermined period is, for example, after the end of the variable game when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, after the end of the variable game in the low probability mode, and in the variable game in the high probability mode. It is set to both or one after the end. In this way, by setting the end of the predetermined period after the end of the variable game when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, for example, an event that can occur between jackpot games can be targeted for prediction. Therefore, the execution period of the jackpot game can be used as an execution period of effects related to the event prediction game, for example, an effect execution period such as event prediction, privilege selection, and notification of a result for a player's prediction.

  In one example of the present embodiment, the start of the predetermined period corresponds to after the end of the 5R normal jackpot, after the end of the 5R probability change jackpot game, and after the end of the 16R probability change jackpot, and the end of the predetermined period is the low probability mode. This applies both after the end of the variable game in the game and after the end of the variable game in the high probability mode. In other words, in the example of the present embodiment, the predetermined period is a period from the end of the jackpot until the next jackpot game is started regardless of whether the mode is the low probability mode or the high probability mode. However, between the time when the main power source of the gaming machine 10 is turned on and the time when the first jackpot game is started, the beginning of the predetermined period starts when the main power source of the gaming machine 10 is turned on or the first variable game starts. It is time to be.

  The expected period is set, for example, during the execution of the jackpot game. The expected period in this case may be set to any one of the opening of the jackpot game, the opening / closing execution mode and the ending, or may be set to a specific round game in the opening / closing execution mode. Moreover, it may straddle a plurality of round games, or may be a period from the opening to the round game, or from the round game to the ending. Thus, by setting the expected period during the execution of the jackpot game, it is possible to execute an effect for causing the player to determine the prediction as a part of the jackpot game effect, and the symbol display unit 341 and the like. The visual recognition of the executed performance is not hindered. In an example of the present embodiment, the expected period is set to the 3R round game in the opening / closing execution mode.

  It is also conceivable that the expected period is set during a game other than the jackpot game, for example, during a variable game or during the suspension of the decorative symbols excluding the jackpot game.

  The event to be predicted by the player is not particularly limited as long as it is an event that can occur during the progress of the game in a predetermined period, but is an event that can be recognized (for example, visible) by the player during the progress of the game. Is preferred. By setting the prediction target event in this way, the player can grasp whether or not his / her prediction is correct, so enjoy the game by paying attention to whether or not the prediction target event occurs in the progress of the game. be able to. As the events to be predicted, for example, a plurality of types are set, and only one of these types can occur in a predetermined period, whether a specific event has occurred in a predetermined period, a specific event in a predetermined period The number of occurrences, events that correlate with the length of a predetermined period, and the like can be considered. In addition, as events to be predicted, events that are advantageous to the player, events that are disadvantageous to the player, events that can occur in the variable game when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, events that can occur in the jackpot game Etc. are also conceivable. By setting the prediction target event in this way, the player can easily grasp whether or not his / her prediction is correct. In one example of the present embodiment, the predicted event is a jackpot type (either a normal jackpot or a probable big jackpot), and a stop symbol type in the symbol display unit 341 in the variable game when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot (Either odd-numbered solos or even-numbered double-throws), the final individual variable game effect type (normal reach effect) executed in the symbol display unit 341 in the variable game when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a big hit , Super reach production or special reach production), whether the variation display for the variable game is a non-normal display different from the normal display when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a big win (holding change) Necessary from the end of this jackpot game to the start of the next jackpot game (predetermined period) Number of times of variation game is (50 times or less, one or more 51 times to 100 times and 101 times) (see FIG. 46 (A)). In addition, the event to be predicted includes a decorative symbol combination type that is stopped and displayed on the symbol display unit 341 at the time of jackpot (from 1 to 9), from the end of the current jackpot game to the start of the next jackpot game (predetermined period ) Specific effects (for example, normal reach effects, super reach effects, special reach effects, specific movable actor (gimmick) action effects, specific notice effects (specific cut-in effects, specific serif effects, specific rank-up effects) ), The number of executions of a specific pseudo-rendition) or the presence or absence of execution, the presence or absence of execution of a specific effect in the variable game when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot (for example, normal reach effect, super reach effect) , Special reach production, specific movable actor (gimmick) operation production, character group production, specific notice production (specific (That-in effect, specific serif effect, specific rank-up effect), specific pseudo-continuous effect), and the variation time of the symbol in the variable game when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot (multiple set time ranges The number of missed reach productions from the end of the current jackpot game to the start of the next jackpot game (predetermined period) can also be considered. In the example of the present embodiment, the player relates to the event determined by the gaming machine 10 and displays his / her prediction from a plurality of options set by the player in an image displayed on the symbol display unit 341 in the jackpot game. Based on the selection (see FIG. 45A). The example forecast target event is an event that occurs at a moderate frequency with a certain probability as the game progresses, so it is more predictive than the case where an event with a low occurrence frequency (probability of occurrence) is targeted. Expectation value is high and the expectation value that can acquire a privilege also becomes high. This makes it possible to appropriately improve the interest of the game without burying the purport of giving the privilege to the target of the prediction by the player in the event prediction game. Further, when a plurality of events having different occurrence frequencies (occurrence probabilities) are included as the prediction target events, a privilege to be given according to the event occurrence frequency or a virtual value described later is set. That is, the privilege or virtual value given to an event with lower occurrence frequency is higher. For example, when the event to be predicted is a jackpot type, in this embodiment, the probability variation jackpot is 75% and the normal jackpot is 25%. become. In this way, a privilege or virtual value is set according to the frequency of occurrence of an event, so that a player can select an event with a low privilege value or a high probability of being granted, It is possible to make a strategy according to one's preference, such as selecting an event having a high virtual value but a low probability of correct answer. Further, when the predicted event is a decorative symbol type (1 to 9) that is stopped and displayed on the symbol display unit 341 when the event is a big hit, there are nine options in the present embodiment. That is, the range of selection of events is wide, and the frequency of occurrence of each decorative symbol is low. Therefore, when the prediction target event is a decorative symbol type (1 to 9) that is stopped and displayed on the symbol display unit 341 at the time of jackpot, the privilege or virtual value to be given is set high. Thus, in the case of a prediction target event with many options, the privilege or virtual value to be given becomes high, so that it is possible to obtain many privileges or virtual value in one event prediction game. Thereby, even when the number of jackpot retreats is small or a single hit jackpot, many benefits or virtual values can be obtained.

  As a privilege given to the player when the player correctly answers the prediction, there is no particular limitation. Base, continuous character ratio, character ratio, expected output value, etc.) can be considered. In addition, when a part of information for specifying performance information (estimation information for estimating performance information) is given to the player, specific information for specifying the performance information is given to the player step by step. By doing so, it is conceivable that the performance information is clearly indicated by giving the player all of the specific information for finally specifying the performance information. In this case, the guess information for guessing the performance information may be selectable by the player from the specific information.

  In addition, the benefits include acquisition of items that can customize the costumes, accessories, hairstyles, etc. of characters appearing in image effects executed on the symbol display unit 341 in the progress of games such as variable game effects, It is conceivable to add music that can be output from the speaker 26 in the course of a game such as a mode. If the benefit of the event prediction game is an item for customization or addition of music, it is possible to improve interest in the event prediction game in order to acquire items and music, and as a result, it is possible to improve interest in games become. In addition, when the privilege is an item or a song, the interest of the game can be improved by stimulating the player's desire to collect. Moreover, it becomes possible to stimulate the player's desire to collect by including rare items and rare music in items and music as a privilege.

  Further, it is conceivable that the privilege is given according to the degree of the virtual value acquired by the player after giving the virtual value when the player correctly answers the prediction. Examples of the virtual value include those that can be quantified, such as virtual coins, virtual money, points, and player levels. In this case, it is conceivable that a plurality of privileges are set and a privilege corresponding to the degree of virtual value (numerical level) is given. Thus, by giving a privilege according to the degree of virtual value, it can enjoy acquiring the several privilege from which an acquisition difficulty differs in steps. In an example of this embodiment, virtual coins are given as virtual values when the player correctly answers the prediction, and some or all of the information related to the game setting values as benefits depending on the number of virtual coins possessed by the player Is given to the player by being displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 during the specific period (see FIG. 44A). The privilege may be given to the player without using the virtual value.

  The specific period during which the benefit is granted is not particularly limited as long as the forecast target event occurs, and is set to a period different from the predetermined period, which is the event generation target period. Part or whole period. Thus, if the specific period is set to a period different from the event occurrence target period, it is possible to separate the period in which the player confirms the occurrence of the event and the period in which the privilege is given to the player. Therefore, it is possible to enjoy the entire period during which the game is progressed or many periods by the event prediction game. In one example of this embodiment, the specific period is a period from the start of the 2R round game in the jackpot game opening / closing execution mode to the end of the jackpot game.

  Furthermore, in the event prediction game, the result of the event and the correctness of the player's prediction are notified during the notification period. In this way, it is possible to accurately recognize the correctness of the prediction by notifying the correctness of the prediction of the player. The notification in the event prediction game of the result and the correctness of the prediction may be performed in any form, but is preferably performed in the symbol display unit 341 from the viewpoint of ease of grasping by the player. In this way, the notification of the correctness of the player's prediction is executed in the symbol display unit 341, so that the player can visually grasp the correctness of the prediction, so that it is easy to grasp the correctness. Also, the notification period for notifying the result of the event prediction game and the correctness of the prediction is not particularly limited as long as the event occurs. For example, the notification period is set to a part of the period during which the jackpot game is being executed. It is preferable that it is before the start of the specific period when a privilege is granted when the answer is correct. In one example of the present embodiment, the notification period is set to the execution period of the 1R round game in the jackpot game opening / closing execution mode.

  Here, FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the jackpot game effect process executed in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. Hereinafter, the jackpot game effect process will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S2501>
As shown in FIG. 39, in the jackpot game effect process, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the jackpot game effect start flag is set to ON (step S2501). The jackpot game effect start flag is a flag indicating that the jackpot game is started, that is, a flag for starting the jackpot game effect, and is set to ON in step S2107 of the command determination process of FIG. When the jackpot game effect start flag is set on (step S2501: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2502, and when the jackpot game effect start flag is set off (step S2501: No). Then, the process proceeds to step S2509.

<Step S2502>
When the jackpot game effect start flag is set to ON (step S2501: Yes), the MPU 51 specifies the jackpot type (step S2502). The jackpot type can be identified from the jackpot flag (5R normal jackpot flag, 5R probability variable jackpot flag or 16R probability variable jackpot flag) that is set to ON according to the jackpot type in step S2103 of the command determination process of FIG.

<Step S2503>
In step S2503, the MPU 51 determines an opening effect to be executed at the opening of the jackpot game. In the opening effect, it is clearly indicated that the jackpot game is started, and the jackpot type specified in step S2502 is clearly indicated or suggested. That is, when the promotion effect is executed in the jackpot game, the jackpot type is suggested, and when the promotion effect is not executed, the jackpot type is specified.

<Step S2504>
In step S2504, the MPU 51 determines the opening / closing execution mode effect executed in the opening / closing execution mode of the jackpot game. In the opening / closing execution mode effect, in each round game, a round game effect that clearly indicates the number of rounds being executed is executed. In the present embodiment, in the 1R round game effect, the symbol display unit 341 clearly indicates whether the player's prediction in the event prediction game is correct or incorrect (see FIG. 42). Further, when the player's prediction is correct in the 2R round game effect, the segments A to G selected by the player in the 7-segment display section 39 are turned on or off in a specific color (FIG. 44). (See (A)). Furthermore, in the 2R round game effect, the 7-segment information image indicating the on / off state of each of the segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39 is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 (see FIG. 44B). In the 3R round game effect, an event prediction image is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 that causes the player to predict an event that will occur in the progress of the game until the next jackpot game is executed (FIG. 45A). reference). In the 4R round game effect, segment selection images for selecting segments A to G (control target segments A to G) to be controlled to be turned on and off in the 7 segment display unit 39 when the player correctly answers the prediction. It is displayed on the symbol display portion 341 (see FIG. 45B). Details of the opening / closing execution mode effect determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 40 to 46.

<Step S2505>
In step S2505, the MPU 51 determines an ending effect to be executed in the ending of the jackpot game. In the ending production, it is clearly indicated that the jackpot game is to be ended. In addition, in the ending production, the number of consecutive jackpots from the first jackpot, the appearance of this jackpot game, during the first jackpot game until the end of this jackpot game (this jackpot game is the first jackpot game In the case of a game, the total number of games for this jackpot game is clearly indicated. The first jackpot is a jackpot in the low probability mode, and the first jackpot game is a jackpot game executed by the first jackpot.

<Steps S2506 to S2508>
In step S2506, the MPU 51 sets the jackpot game effect start flag to OFF, and further corresponds to the opening effect determined in step S2503, the opening / closing execution mode effect determined in step S2504, and the ending effect determined in step S3805. The display variation pattern command to be transmitted is transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S2507). Thereby, the display control device 6 specifies an image effect to be executed by the symbol display unit 341 as an opening effect, an opening / closing execution mode effect, and an ending effect in the jackpot game. Further, the MPU 51 controls the speaker 26 and the illumination unit 27, and the audio corresponding to the opening effect determined in step S2503, the opening / closing execution mode effect determined in step S2504, and the ending effect determined in step S3805. The output effect and the lamp effect are executed (step S2508), and the jackpot game effect process ends.

<Step S2509>
When the big hit game effect start flag is set to off (step S2501: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the round game effect start flag is set to on (step S2509). The round game effect start flag is a flag for starting a round game effect for a corresponding round game among a plurality of round games in the opening / closing execution mode, and is set to ON in step S2109 in the command determination process of FIG. . When the round game effect start flag is set to on (step S2509: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2510 and when the round game effect start flag is set to off (step S2509: No). Then, the process proceeds to step S2511.

<Step S2510>
When the round game effect start flag is set to ON (step S2509: Yes), the MPU 51 executes a round game effect start process (step S2510), and ends the jackpot game effect process. In the round game effect start process, the MPU 51 transmits a command for starting the round game effect to the display control device 6. Thereby, the display control device 6 causes the symbol display unit 341 to execute the round game effect of the corresponding round game as the image effect. Further, in the round game effect start process, the MPU 51 controls the speaker 26 and the electric decoration unit 27 to execute the sound output effect and the lamp effect of the corresponding round game. In addition, when the round game effect start flag is to start the 2R round game, the MPU 51 executes control of turning on / off each segment A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39. As a result, the segments A to G in the 7-segment display unit 39 are turned on or off with a specific color or a predetermined color as described above. Specifically, according to the control content of each segment A to G of the 7 segment display unit 39 determined in step S2808 of the 2R round game effect determination process of FIG. Turned on or off with a predetermined color. A segment that is lit in a specific color indicates a segment that forms part of a number indicating a game setting value. Further, a segment that is lit in a predetermined color indicates that it is an unknown segment (uncontrolled target segment) whether or not it forms part of a number indicating a game setting value. The segment to be turned off indicates that the segment does not constitute a part of the number indicating the game setting value. That is, in the 7-segment display unit 39, the game setting value is clearly indicated by displaying the whole of any of the numbers 1 to 6 by the segment lit in the specific color, and the number of the number by the segment lit in the specific color. A game setting value is suggested by displaying a part (see FIG. 44A).

<Step S2511>
When the round game effect start flag is set to off (step S2509: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the round game effect end flag is set to on (step S2511). The round game effect end flag is a flag for ending the currently executed round game effect, and is set to ON in step S2111 in the command determination process of FIG. When the round game effect end flag is set to ON (step S2511: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2512 and when the round game effect end flag is set to OFF (step S2511: No). Then, the process proceeds to step S2513.

<Step S2512>
When the round game effect end flag is set to ON (step S2511: Yes), the MPU 51 executes a round game effect end process (step S2512) and ends the jackpot game process. In the round game effect end process, the MPU 51 transmits a command for ending the round game effect to the display control device 6. Thereby, the display control device 6 ends the round game effect being executed in the symbol display unit 341. Further, in the round game effect end process, the MPU 51 controls the speaker 26 and the electric decoration unit 27 and ends the sound output effect and the lamp effect of the round game being executed by the speaker 26 and the electric decoration unit 27.

<Step S2513>
When the round game effect end flag is set to off (step S2511: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the ending effect start flag is set to on (step S2513). The ending effect start flag is a flag for ending the currently executed round game effect and starting the ending, and is set to ON in step S2113 in the command determination process of FIG. When the ending effect start flag is set to on (step S2513: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2514, and when the ending effect start flag is set to off (step S2513: No), the process is performed. Goes to step S2515.

<Step S2514>
When the ending effect start flag is set to ON (step S2513: Yes), the MPU 51 executes an ending effect start process (step S2513) and ends the jackpot game process. In the ending effect start process, the MPU 51 transmits a command for causing the display control device 6 to start ending. Thereby, the display control apparatus 6 makes the symbol display part 341 perform an ending effect as an image effect. Further, in the ending effect start process, the MPU 51 controls the speaker 26 and the illumination unit 27 to execute the sound output effect and the lamp effect as the ending effect.

<Step S2515>
When the ending effect start flag is set to off (step S2513: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the jackpot game effect end flag is set to on (step S2515). The jackpot game effect end flag is a flag for ending the jackpot game effect, and is set to ON in step S2115 in the command determination process of FIG. When the jackpot game effect end flag is set on (step S2515: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2516 and when the jackpot game effect end flag is set off (step S2515: No). Then, the jackpot game effect process is terminated.

<Step S2516>
When the jackpot game effect end flag is set to ON (step S2515: Yes), the MPU 51 executes a jackpot game effect end process (step S2516) and ends the jackpot game effect process. In the jackpot game effect end process, the MPU 51 transmits a command to the display control device 6 to end the ending effect (end the jackpot game effect). As a result, the display control device 6 ends the ending effect being executed in the symbol display unit 341. In the jackpot game effect end process, the MPU 51 controls the speaker 26 and the illumination unit 27 and ends the ending effect being executed by the speaker 26 and the illumination unit 27. Then, the MPU 51 executes control to turn off all the segments of the 7-segment display unit 39. Thereby, the presentation period of the information that clearly or suggests the game setting value can be defined during the execution of the jackpot game. Further, the number of virtual coins possessed by the MPU 51 and the player is reduced to zero. Specifically, the value of a coin number counter indicating the number of virtual coins possessed later is cleared to zero.

[Open / close execution mode effect determination processing]
In the opening / closing execution mode effect determination process executed in step S2504 of the jackpot game effect process of FIG. 39, a round game effect executed in each round game in the jackpot game opening / closing execution mode is determined. In the present embodiment, an effect related to the event prediction game is determined as the round game effect for the 1R to 4R round games in the opening / closing execution mode. Here, FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the opening / closing execution mode effect determination process executed in the jackpot game process of FIG. Hereinafter, the opening / closing execution mode effect determination process will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S2601>
As shown in FIG. 40, in the opening / closing execution mode effect determination process, in step S2601, the MPU 51 executes the 1R round game effect determination process in the opening / closing execution mode.

[Round game effect decision process of 1R]
In the 1R round game effect determination process, as the 1R round game effect determination, the result of whether or not the player's prediction for the event that occurs in the progress of the game from the previous jackpot to the current jackpot game is correct is clearly indicated. The production to be performed is determined. Specifically, in the 1R round game effect determination process, the symbol display unit 341 includes an image indicating whether or not the player's prediction is correct, an image indicating the number of virtual coins held by the player, and the like. A correct image (see FIG. 42A) or an expected incorrect image (see FIG. 42B) is determined. Here, FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the 1R round game effect determining process executed in the opening / closing execution mode effect determining process of FIG. Hereinafter, the 1R round game effect determination process will be described with reference to FIG.

<Steps S2701 and S2702>
As shown in FIG. 41, in the round game effect determination process in the 1R round, the MPU 51 actually generates a player's prediction for a prediction target event that occurs in the progress of the game from the previous jackpot game to the current jackpot game. The generated event is compared (step S2701), and it is determined whether or not the player's prediction is correct (step S2702). Note that a method for selecting a prediction target event by the MPU 51 and a method for selecting an event from a prediction target by the player will be described later. Here, when the player's prediction is correct (step S2702: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2703, and when the player's prediction is incorrect (step S2702: No), the processing is stepped. The process moves to S2706.

<Step S2703>
When the player's prediction is correct (step S2702: YES), the MPU 51 sets the predicted correct answer flag to ON (step S2703). The predicted correct answer flag is a flag indicating that the player's prediction is correct, and the player corresponding to the segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39 in step S2801 of the 2R round game effect determination process of FIG. The selected segment (control target segment) is referred to to determine whether to turn on or off.

<Step S2704>
In step S2704, the MPU 51 adds the acquired virtual coin number to the virtual coin number possessed by the player. The number of virtual coins possessed by the player can be managed, for example, by setting a coin number counter and using the value of the coin number counter.

<Step S2705>
In step S2705, the MPU 51 determines an effect in which the predicted correct image is displayed as the 1R round game effect, and ends the 1R round game effect determination process. Here, FIG. 42A is a diagram illustrating an example of the 1R round game screen on the symbol display unit 341 when the player's prediction is correct.

  As shown in FIG. 42 (A), the predicted correct image indicates an image indicating that the game is the 1R round game in the opening / closing execution mode (an image of “ROUND1”), and indicates that the result of the player's prediction is announced. An image (an image of “result announcement”), an image indicating a player's prediction (an image of “prediction: option X”), and an image (“correct answer: Option X ”), an image indicating the number of virtual coins acquired as a benefit for the current event prediction game (“ acquired coin: 5 images ”), and virtual coins possessed by the player after the current event prediction game Of images indicating the number of coins (an image of “5 coins possessed”). In the predicted correct image shown in FIG. 42 (A), the player's prediction is “X” while the event is “X”, so the player's prediction is correct, and the player's acquired virtual This indicates that there are five coins and that there are five virtual coins currently possessed after the current event prediction game. Thus, in the predicted correct answer image, it is displayed that the player's prediction is correct, so that the player can grasp that his / her prediction is correct. In addition, by displaying the number of virtual coins possessed after the current event prediction game in the predicted correct image, it is possible to grasp the current number of virtual coins possessed. Thereby, the player can easily determine options (items) in event prediction described later and control target segments on the 7-segment display unit 39 in consideration of the number of virtual coins possessed by the player. .

<Step S2706>
Returning to the description of FIG. 41, when the player's prediction is incorrect (step S2702: No), the MPU 51 sets the number of virtual coins possessed by the player to 0 (step S2706). For example, the MPU 51 clears the value of the coin number counter to zero. That is, in the present embodiment, when the player's prediction is incorrect, all possessed virtual coins are confiscated and the possessed coins are reduced to zero. In this way, when the player's prediction is incorrect, the number of virtual coins possessed by the player is set to 0, thereby increasing the difficulty of increasing the number of virtual coins possessed by the player. it can. In other words, it is difficult for the jackpot renso to possess a large number of virtual coins unless the event prediction game is answered correctly in succession. Therefore, a privilege (information for specifying a game setting value) can be prevented from being easily given to the player, and a game setting value can be prevented from being specified or estimated. As a result, when the game setting value is a low setting value (when the jackpot probability is low), the player recognizes that the game setting value is low at an early stage, and the player ends the game on the gaming machine 10 at an early stage. Is suppressed.

  Even if the player's prediction is incorrect, the virtual coin number before the prediction is incorrect is maintained without reducing the number of virtual coins possessed by the player to zero. May be. In this way, when the prediction is incorrect, maintaining the number of virtual coins possessed by the player can suppress a decrease in interest in the event prediction game.

<Step S2707>
In step S2707, the MPU 51 determines an effect in which an expected incorrect answer image is displayed as the 1R round game effect, and ends the 1R round game effect determination process. Here, FIG. 42 (B) is a diagram illustrating an example of the 1R round game screen on the symbol display unit 341 when the player's prediction is incorrect.

  As shown in FIG. 42 (B), the predicted incorrect answer image is an image (“ROUND1” image) indicating that it is the 1R round game in the opening / closing execution mode, and that the result of the player's prediction is announced. An image (“result announcement” image), a player's prediction image (“expectation: option X” image), and an image (“correct answer”) indicating an actually occurring event (ie, correct answer) among the prediction target events. : Image of “option Y”), an image indicating the number of virtual coins acquired as a benefit for the current event prediction game (image of “acquired coin: 0”), and a virtual possessed by the player after the current event prediction game It includes an image indicating the number of coins (an image of “owned coins: 0”). In the predicted incorrect answer image shown in FIG. 42B, the player's prediction is “X” while the player's prediction is “Y”, so the player's prediction is incorrect, This indicates that the number of acquired virtual coins is 0, and the number of virtual coins currently possessed after the current event prediction game is 0.

<Step S2602>
Returning to the description of FIG. 40, in step S2602, the MPU 51 executes a 2R round game effect determination process in the opening / closing execution mode.

[2R round game effect decision processing]
In the 2R round game effect determination process, the control content for each segment A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39 is determined. For example, when the player's prediction is correct and the segment G is selected by the player, the segment G becomes a control target segment that is a control target of turning on / off, and is controlled to be turned on or off with a specific color. Is determined (see FIG. 44A). For example, when the player's prediction is correct, when the game setting value is 1, it is determined that the segment G is controlled to be turned off, and when the game setting value is other than 1, lighting control is performed with a specific color. It is decided that Then, in the 2R round game effect determination process, 7 segments related to the turn-on / off of each segment A to G on the 7-segment display unit 39 according to the turn-on / off state of each segment A to G on the 7-segment display unit 39 It is determined that the information image is displayed on the image display unit 341 (see FIG. 44B). FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the 2R round game effect determining process executed in the opening / closing execution mode effect determining process of FIG. Hereinafter, the 2R round game effect determination process will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S2801>
As shown in FIG. 43, in the 2R round game effect determination process, it is determined whether or not the predicted correct answer flag is set to ON (step S2801). The predicted correct answer flag is a flag indicating that the player's prediction is correct, and is set to ON in step S2703 in the 1R round game effect determining process in FIG. When the predicted correct answer flag is set to on (step S2801: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2802, and when the predicted correct answer flag is set to off (step S2801: No), the process proceeds to step S2802. The process moves to S2807.

<Step S2802>
When the predicted correct answer flag is set to ON (step S2801: YES), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the segment A to G that can be controlled to be turned on / off in the 7-segment display unit 39 is selected by the player. (Step S2802). Here, the player can decide not to select the segments A to G that can be controlled to be turned on / off by his / her own intention (see FIGS. 45C and 48C). Further, as will be described later, the number of virtual coins necessary for selecting each segment A to G as the control target of turning on and off is set (see FIG. 46C), so depending on the number of virtual coins possessed It may be impossible to select the segments A to G that can be controlled to be turned off. Therefore, in step S2801, it is determined whether or not the segments A to G that can be controlled to be turned on and off are selected by the player. When the segments A to G that can be controlled to be turned on / off are selected (step S2802: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2803 and selects the segments A to G that can be controlled to turn on and off. If not (step S2802: NO), the process proceeds to step S2807.

<Step S2803>
When the segments A to G are selected (step S2802: Yes), the MPU 51 specifies the selected segments (control target segments) A to G selected by the player (step S2803). The segments A to G selected by the player can specify the selected segment by referring to the storage area for the segment set in the RAM 512. The storage area is not only information related to the selected segment, but also information related to the already controlled segment that has already been turned on / off (information identifying a segment that is lit in a specific color and a segment that is turned off), and Information for specifying an uncontrolled segment that has not been controlled until now is stored.

<Step S2804>
In step S2804, the MPU 51 reads out the game setting value stored in the RAM 512. Since the game setting value is stored in the RAM 512 in step S2119 of the command determination process of FIG. 29, the game setting value can be read by referring to the RAM 512.

<Steps S2805 and S2806>
In step S2805, the MPU 51 reads in the segment type specified in step S2803 and the step S2804 whether to turn on or off the segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39 selected by the player in a specific color. It is determined based on the game setting value to be played. At this time, the MPU 51 sets the predicted correct answer flag to OFF (step S2806).

<Step S2807>
In step S2807, the MPU 51 reads the already controlled target segment and the uncontrolled target segment. Specifically, the MPU 51 can identify and read the already controlled target segment and the uncontrolled target segment by referring to the storage area for the segment set in the RAM 512 described above. Here, the controlled target segment is lit in a specific color among the segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39 from the first jackpot (big jackpot in the latest low probability mode) to the previous jackpot, Or it is a segment that has been turned off. A segment that is lit in a specific color indicates a segment that forms part of a number indicating a game setting value. The segment to be turned off indicates that the segment does not constitute a part of the number indicating the game setting value. When the jackpot is the first jackpot, there is no already controlled segment. The uncontrolled target segment is a segment that is not turned on or off in a specific color, and is turned on in a predetermined color on the 7-segment display unit 39. A segment that is lit in a predetermined color indicates that it is unknown whether or not it constitutes a part of a number indicating a game setting value. In addition, when all the segments of the 7-segment display unit 39 are already controlled target segments, there are no uncontrolled target segments. Then, in the 7-segment display unit 39, the game setting value is clearly indicated by displaying the whole of any of the numbers 1 to 6 by the segment lit in the specific color, and the number of the number by the segment lit in the specific color. A game setting value is suggested by displaying a part (see FIG. 44A).

<Step S2808>
In step S2808, the MPU 51 determines the control content for the 7-segment display unit 39. For example, if the player's prediction is correct and segments A to G that can be controlled to be turned on / off are selected by the player, the MPU 51 turns on / off the selected segment determined in step S2805, and step S2807. The control content for the 7-segment display unit 39 is determined based on the already-controlled segment and the uncontrolled segment that are read in step (1). For example, as shown in FIG. 44 (A), for example, when the game setting value is 3, if the player's prediction is correct and the segment G is selected by the player, the segment G is in a specific color. It is determined that the segment E is to be lit, the segment E is determined to be extinguished when the segment to be controlled is the segment E, and the segments A to D and F that are uncontrolled segments are lit in a predetermined color Is determined.

  Further, if the player's prediction is incorrect, and even if the player's prediction is correct, if the segment A to G that can be controlled to be turned on / off is not selected by the player, step S2807 is performed. The control content for the 7-segment display unit 39 is determined based on the already-controlled segment and the uncontrolled segment that are read in step S2.

  And when the control content with respect to the 7 segment display part 39 is determined, in the 2R round game effect start process of step S2510 in the jackpot effect process of FIG. 39, according to the control content determined in this step S2808, 7 segment display The unit 39 is turned on or off with a specific color or a predetermined color. Thereby, the game setting value can be specified or estimated by displaying all or part of the numbers indicating the game setting value by the segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39.

<Step S2809>
In step S2809, the MPU 51 determines a 7-segment information image to be displayed on the symbol display unit 341 in the 2R round game. Here, FIG. 44B is a diagram showing an example of the 2R round game screen on which the 7-segment information image is displayed. As shown in FIG. 44 (B), the 7-segment information image includes an image (“ROUND2” image) 7, 7-segment image, and segment on / off information image indicating the 2R round game in the open / close execution mode. Including.

  The 7-segment image is an image that displays on / off states of the respective segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39 that clearly or suggests game setting values in the jackpot game on the symbol display unit 341. A plurality of segment images corresponding to the segments A to G are included. The 7-segment image is shown in FIG. 44B when it is determined in the previous step S2808 that the segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39 are turned on and off as in the example shown in FIG. Thus, the segment image corresponding to the segment G is displayed in a specific color, the segment image corresponding to the segment E is not displayed, and the segment images corresponding to the segments A to D and F are displayed in a predetermined color. In this manner, the on / off state of each segment A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39 is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 by the 7-segment image. Therefore, the player can grasp the on / off states of the segments A to G while keeping his line of sight on the symbol display unit 341 without having to visually recognize the seven segment display unit 39. Thereby, the player can concentrate on the effect performed in the symbol display unit 341.

  The segment on / off information image shows the on / off state of each of the segments A to G on the 7-segment display unit 39 as character information. In the segment on / off information image, the on / off state is indicated as “lit”, “off”, or “?” For each of the segments A to G. “Lit” indicates that the corresponding segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39 are in a specific color and the “off” state indicates that the corresponding segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39 are in the off state. Indicates. Further, “?” Indicates that the corresponding segments A to G are uncontrollable segments that have not been controlled to be turned on / off, and are lit in a predetermined color. When it is determined in the previous step S2808 that the segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39 are turned on and off as in the example shown in FIG. 44A, the segments are displayed as shown in FIG. “ON” indicating that G is displayed in a specific color is displayed, “OFF” indicating that the segment E is OFF, and segments A to D and F are uncontrolled segments. “?” Is displayed.

<Step S2603>
Returning to FIG. 40, in step S2603 of the opening / closing execution mode effect determination process, the MPU 51 executes the 3R round game effect determination process. Here, FIG. 45A is a diagram showing an example of the 3R round game screen (event prediction selection screen) in the opening / closing execution mode.

  In the 3R round game screen (event prediction selection screen) shown in FIG. 45A, a temporary selection is made based on an option image corresponding to an item to be selected by operating the upper selection button 211 or the lower selection button 212. Then, the temporarily selected item can be selected by operating the enter button 21B. In the 3R round game screen, the option images corresponding to the temporarily selected items are displayed with emphasis over the other option images. In the present embodiment, the option images are temporarily selected by displaying the cursor image on the left side. It is further emphasized that Note that, on the 3R round game screen, an item corresponding to the top option image among selectable items is displayed (default display) in a temporarily selected state at the start of each round game. Specifically, at the start of the 3R round game, “NORMAL (10 cards)” is displayed in a temporarily selected state on the 3R round game screen. Further, when the determination button 21B is not operated in the 3R round game, it is determined that the item temporarily selected at the end of the 3R round game is selected. For example, in the 3R round game, when neither the operation on the upper selection button 211 and the lower selection button 212 nor the operation on the determination button 21B is executed, the item temporarily selected as a default (for example, “normal”) is determined. The

  As shown in FIG. 45A, the 3R round game screen (event prediction selection screen) is an event prediction selection screen for determining a player's prediction in the event prediction game. The 3R round game screen (event prediction selection screen) includes an explanation image and a prediction option image.

  The explanation image explains an event to be expected by the player, and corresponds to an image displayed as “What is the final effect at the next big hit?”. In the example shown in the figure, the predicted event is a reach type for jackpot. In addition, a plurality of predicted events are set including the reach type, and accordingly, a plurality of explanatory images are set corresponding to each predicted event. Here, FIG. 46A is an expected event selection table that is referred to when the MPU 51 selects an expected event. As shown in FIG. 46 (A), in the prediction event selection table, five prediction events A to E are defined by the prediction event selection counter for each of the case where the jackpot game is a normal jackpot game and a probability variable jackpot game. .

  The forecast event A (jacket type) is to predict whether the next jackpot is a probable jackpot (5R probability jackpot or 16R probability jackpot) or a 5R regular jackpot (5R regular jackpot). The explanatory image when the predicted event A is selected is, for example, a character image displayed as “What is the next jackpot?” Or the like.

  Anticipated event B (stop symbol type) is a stop symbol type of the decorative symbol at the time of the big hit, and the combination of the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed on the symbol display unit 341 at the next big hit is an odd symbol of the odd symbol and an empty symbol of the even symbol It makes you predict which of your eyes it is. The explanatory image when the predicted event B is selected is, for example, a character image that is displayed as “numbers at the next big hit is odd or even?

  Predicted event C (presence / absence of pending change) is the presence / absence of pending change at the time of jackpot, and the icon image indicating the change in the symbol display unit 341 at the next jackpot is a normal icon image and a normal icon image. It is possible to predict which of the non-normal icon images has a different aspect. The icon image indicates the expectation that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery for the variable game is a jackpot. A normal icon image has a higher appearance rate (selection rate) than a non-normal icon, but has a lower expectation for being a big hit. As the non-normal icon image, for example, a color, a shape, a behavior, and the like are different from those of the normal icon image. The explanatory image when the predicted event C is selected is, for example, a character image that is displayed as “Holding change at the next big hit?” Or the like.

  The predicted event D (reach effect type) is for predicting the final individual variable game effect (reach effect) executed by the symbol display unit 341 at the next big hit. Specifically, it is predicted whether the final floating game effect is a normal reach effect, a super reach effect, or a special reach effect. The explanatory image when the predicted event D is selected is, for example, a character image displayed as “What is the final effect at the next big hit?” Or the like. Note that when the reach production type is set as an expected event, it may be set to another category instead of the normal reach production, the super reach production, and the special reach production. For example, the final individual variation game effect may be a battle system effect or a mission system effect. In addition, it is also conceivable that an effect type unique to the game modes A to C selected in the variable game that has been the trigger of this jackpot is set as the expected event. For example, when the game mode is A, it is also conceivable to set as a predicted event whether or not the unique effect that becomes the next jackpot trigger is the variable game effect pattern Z3 (see FIG. 34). In this case, when the game mode is changed from A to B or C, the expected game event variation pattern Z3 is not selected in the game modes B and C (see FIG. 34). become. In this case, it may be determined that the player's prediction is correct when the corresponding unique effect in the changed game mode is executed. It is conceivable to use the value of the effect pattern type counter to associate the unique effects in the game modes A to C. For example, if the value of the effect pattern type counter in the case of determining the floating game effect is within the range of the counter value for determining the unique effect that is the prediction target, it may be determined that the prediction is correct. It is done. Specifically, for example, in the special reach effect type selection table shown in FIG. 34, the unique effect that becomes the next big hit trigger is the variable game effect pattern Z3 of the game mode A (the value of the effect pattern type counter is 40 to 59). When setting whether or not there is an expected event, when the game mode is changed to B or C, when the effect pattern Z6 (the value of the effect pattern type counter is 40 to 59) is executed in the game mode B In the game mode C, when the effect pattern Z9 (the value of the effect pattern type counter is 40 to 59) is executed, it is considered that the prediction by the player is correct. Thus, it becomes possible to set the anticipation event regarding the specific effect of each game mode A-C by matching with respect to the specific effect of game mode A-C mutually. In addition, in a situation where the player's prediction is determined to be incorrect, it is determined that the player is correct, so that it is possible to improve interest due to unexpectedness.

  If the game mode is changed when the final individual variable game effect (reach effect) executed by the symbol display unit 341 is predicted at the next big hit, the game before the change predicted by the player It is also conceivable that the player can grasp the final individual variation game effect in the changed game mode corresponding to the mode. For example, it may be possible to display on the symbol display unit 341 the individual variable game effect type predicted by the player in the changed game mode in the standby state. Specifically, it is conceivable to display on the symbol display unit 341 the individual variable game effect type predicted by the player in the changed game mode on an event prediction change screen (see FIG. 48A) described later. Further, in the variable game effect, the individual variable game effect type predicted by the player in the changed game mode may be displayed on the symbol display unit 341. In this way, by displaying the individual variable game effect type predicted by the player in the changed game mode, even if there is a change in the game mode, it is possible to reliably grasp the expected content, so in the expected game It is possible to enjoy whether the prediction is correct.

  The predicted event E (number of times of variable game) is the number of times of variable game from the current jackpot to the next jackpot, and predicts which of a plurality of preset variable periods. The explanatory image when the predicted event E is selected is, for example, a character image displayed as “How many rotations until the next big hit?”.

  In the present embodiment, the predicted event selection counter is not assigned to the predicted event E. That is, the predicted event E (estimation of the number of fluctuations) is selected only when the current jackpot is a promising jackpot, and is not selected when the current jackpot is a normal jackpot. Here, in this embodiment, as described later, it is possible to change the player's prediction in a standby state (a state in which no variable game is executed and no jackpot game is executed). In addition, since the standby state is not during the jackpot series, the player may retreat. Therefore, it is assumed that the current player wants to change the prediction because the previous player's prediction does not reflect the current player's prediction. It is also assumed that the same player wants to change his / her prediction even if the game continues after the jackpot retreat is over. Therefore, in this embodiment, it is possible to change the prediction in the standby state, but if the expected event is the number of changed games until the next jackpot, even if the number of variable games predicted by the player is exceeded, the jackpot lottery will be won Otherwise, the player's expectation will be lost. Recognizing a change in the prediction even when such a prediction is lost deviates from the objective of making the player's prediction changeable. Therefore, in the case of a normal jackpot game, the forecast event (the number of fluctuations until the next jackpot in this embodiment) that allows the forecast change in the standby state to be confirmed by the next jackpot is determined. Are excluded from the expected events.

  The prediction option image is used to cause the player to select a prediction from a plurality of options. In the example shown in FIG. 45A, the expected event is the reach type, and the expected option image is “normal (10) for selecting the normal reach effect as the final individual variable game effect type in the variable game effect at the time of the big hit. Normal reach production selection image displayed as “Sheet)”, super reach production selection image displayed as “Super (3 photos)” for selecting the super reach production, and “special (1)” for selecting the special reach production. Image) ”is displayed. Each reach effect selection image includes a payout image indicating a payout (the number of acquired virtual coins) when a player's prediction is correct. In the example shown in FIG. 45A, the payout image is an image shown in parentheses in each reach effect selection image. In addition, since a plurality of predicted event images are set for the predicted option image, a plurality of predicted option images are set corresponding to the number of predicted events. Here, FIG. 46B is a relationship table between options and payouts that are referred to when option images are determined according to the predicted events A to E selected by the MPU 51.

  As shown in FIG. 46 (B), in the relationship table, options and payouts are defined for each predicted event A to E. The payout for each option in each of the expected events A to E is set according to the ease of occurrence of each option (occurrence probability), and the payout is smaller as the event is more likely to occur and the payout is higher as the event is less likely to occur. Become. For example, in the forecast event A, the options are “probable jackpot” and “ordinary jackpot”, and “probable jackpot” (incidence rate is 75%), which is likely to occur, is a dividend of “1”. The “ordinary jackpot” (occurrence rate is 25%), which is hard to be generated, has a dividend of “3”. Similarly, for the forecast events B to E, a dividend is set according to the ease of occurrence of each option in each forecast event. In this way, the payout for each option in each predicted event A to E is set according to the ease of occurrence of each option, so that the number of virtual coins acquired for each option in the predicted event A to E is obtained. Can be equalized. Thereby, generation | occurrence | production of the advantage and disadvantage between anticipation events AE can be prevented. Further, when a plurality of events (options) having different occurrence frequencies (occurrence probabilities) are included as the prediction target events, the number of virtual coins to be given according to the event occurrence frequency is set. That is, the number of virtual coins to be given increases as the occurrence frequency decreases. In this way, by setting the number of virtual coins according to the occurrence frequency of the event, the player selects an event with a small number of virtual coins to be given but a high probability of correct answer, or a virtual coin to be given It is possible to formulate a strategy according to one's preference, such as selecting an event with a large number of images but a low probability of correct answer. For example, it is necessary to determine the segments A to G necessary for confirming whether the game setting value is high or low or that the game setting value is a specific game setting value, and to turn the segments A to G on and off. Strategies such as selecting events that can efficiently acquire the number of virtual coins can be established. Thus, the interest of the game is improved by making a strategy in the prediction game and selecting events and selecting segments A to G.

  It is also conceivable that the expected value of the number of acquired virtual coins for each option in the predicted events A to E is set unevenly. In this case, there is an advantage / disadvantage between the predicted events A to E, so that the player is amazed at what predicted events A to E are selected, and can enjoy the open / close execution mode of the jackpot game. it can.

  Further, in the present embodiment, an explanation image and a prediction option image for causing the player to select a prediction are displayed on the symbol display unit 341 in the 3R round game in the opening / closing execution mode (see FIG. 45A). The explanation image and the predicted option image may be displayed on the symbol display unit 341 while the variation game is being executed or when the variation of the decorative symbol excluding the jackpot game is stopped. In this case, the explanation image and the predicted option image are preferably displayed in a partial area of the symbol display unit 341, for example, a region that does not hinder the visual display of the decorative symbol display, and a touch panel is provided on the front side of the symbol display unit 341. It is preferable to arrange and allow the player to select a prediction by a touch operation by the player.

<Step S2604>
Returning to FIG. 40, in step S2604 of the opening / closing execution mode effect determination process, the MPU 51 executes the 4R round game effect determination process. Here, FIG. 45B is a diagram showing an example of the 4R round game screen (segment selection screen) in the opening / closing execution mode.

  In the 4R round game screen (segment selection screen) shown in FIG. 45 (B), as with the 3R round game screen, it corresponds to the item to be selected by operating the upper selection button 211 or the lower selection button 212. After the provisional selection is performed based on the option image to be selected, the provisionally selected item can be selected by operating the determination button 21B. On the 4R round game screen, the option image corresponding to the temporarily selected item is displayed with emphasis over the other option images, and in the present embodiment, the option image is temporarily selected by displaying the cursor image on the left side. It is further emphasized that On the 4R round game screen, an item corresponding to the top option image among selectable items is displayed in a state of being temporarily selected at the start of the round game (default display). Further, when the determination button 21B is not operated in the 4R round game, the item is temporarily selected at the end of the 4R round game. For example, in the 4R round game, when neither the operation on the upper selection button 211 and the lower selection button 212 nor the operation on the determination button 21B is executed, the item temporarily selected as a default is determined. The default display may be an option image corresponding to the least important segment A to G of the selectable segments A to G in the 7 segment display unit 39. On the 4R round game screen (segment selection screen) shown in FIG. 45B, a segment C selection image for selecting segment C may be displayed by default.

  As shown in FIG. 45B, the 4R round game screen (segment selection screen) includes a 7-segment image, a plurality of segment selection images, a segment non-selection image, and a coin count image.

  The 7-segment image clearly shows the on / off state on the 7-segment display unit 39 that suggests or clearly indicates the game setting value in the jackpot game, and a plurality of segments corresponding to the plurality of segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39 Including segment images. The segment image on the 4R round game screen (segment selection screen) is basically the same as the segment image on the 2R round game screen. Therefore, the player can grasp the on / off state of each of the segments A to G on the 7-segment display unit 39 without confirming the 7-segment display unit 39 by using the 7-segment image. Convenience in selecting a segment that can be controlled to be turned on / off on the display unit 341 is enhanced. In addition, the segment image on the 4R round game screen (segment selection screen) is different from the segment image on the 2R round game screen, and the temporarily selected segment is displayed differently from the other segments. The For example, it can be distinguished from other segments by being displayed in a different color from other segments or displayed in a blinking manner. In the example shown in FIG. 45B, segment A is temporarily selected.

  The plurality of segment selection images are used to select which segment A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39 is to be controlled to be turned on / off when the player's prediction is correct. The plurality of segment selection images are displayed as “Segment A (5)” for selecting segment A, and “Segment B (50)” for selecting segment B. Segment B selection image, segment C selection image displayed as “Segment C (1 sheet)” for selecting segment C, segment D displayed as “Segment D (5 sheets)” for selecting segment D A selected image, a segment E selected image displayed as “Segment E (10 sheets)” for selecting the segment E, and a segment F selected image displayed as “Segment F (30 sheets)” for selecting the segment F , And a segment G selection image displayed as “segment G (three)” for selecting the segment G.

  Each segment selection image includes a coin number image indicating the number of virtual coins necessary for the corresponding segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39 to be controlled to be turned on / off at the time of the predicted correct answer. The coin number image is a character image displayed in parentheses in each segment selection image. For example, in the segment A selection image, the “(5)” portion of “Segment A (5)” corresponds to the coin number image, and the segment A is the control target of turning on / off at the time of the predicted correct answer. The required number of virtual coins is five. Similarly, the number of virtual coins necessary for making the segments B to G control targets for turning on and off at the predicted correct answer is 50 for segment B, 1 for segment C, 5 for segment D, and 10 for segment E. 30 sheets, segment F, and 3 segments G.

  The coin number image indicates the number of virtual coins possessed when the player's prediction is correct. Then, the player can grasp the possessed virtual coin number when the player's prediction is correct based on the coin number image. Therefore, the player can select the segments A to G to be turned on / off in the 7-segment display unit 39 based on the segment selection image while referring to the coin number image, so that convenience is improved. The player can also think of a strategy for estimating or specifying the game setting value based on the virtual coin number to be grasped based on the coin number image.

  Here, FIG. 46C is a diagram showing the number of virtual coins necessary for selecting each of the segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39. In FIG. 46C, the relationship between the on / off state of each segment A to G shown in FIG. 5C and the numerical value displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 is shown simultaneously. As described above with reference to FIG. 5C, the segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39 are not the same in importance in estimating the game setting value, but are different in importance. For example, segments A to G are different in the ease of guessing the game setting value itself, the ease of judging the level of the game setting value alone, and the game setting value by combining with other segments And the ease of guessing the height is different. Therefore, the ease of guessing the game setting value differs depending on the order in which the segments are to be controlled. In the present embodiment, the number of virtual coins necessary for making the control target of turning on / off at the time of the correct answer is set according to the importance in estimating the game setting values of the segments A to G. Yes. In other words, the lower the importance in estimating the game setting value, the smaller the required number of virtual coins, and the higher the importance, the greater the required number of virtual coins. From this point of view, the specific number of virtual coins required to make a segment a control target of turning on and off at the time of an expected correct answer is as described above for five segments A, 50 segments B, and segments C One sheet, five segments D, ten segment E, thirty segments F, and three segments G are set. In this way, by setting the number of virtual coins necessary to control each segment A to G to be turned on / off at the time of the predicted correct answer, the difficulty of guessing the game setting value is increased, and the game setting is made to the player. It is possible to prevent the value from being easily grasped or estimated. As a result, the difficulty of guessing the game setting value is increased, so that when the game setting value is set low (when the jackpot probability is low), the player ends the game on the gaming machine 10 at an early stage. Can be prevented. In addition, even if the difficulty of guessing the game setting value is increased, it becomes easier to guess the game setting value as the number of jackpot recreational resorts increases. The interest in guessing the game setting value is also improved.

  Note that the control target segment in the case where the player correctly answers the prediction may be determined in the gaming machine 10. By determining the segment to be controlled in the gaming machine 10 and considering which segment A to G to be the selected segment in a relatively short time such as during a round game, the operation on the selection button 21A and the determination button 21B Eliminates the need to select a segment. This frees you from the hassle of reviewing selected segments and operating buttons.

  Further, when the control target segment is determined in the gaming machine 10, it may be determined in consideration of at least one of the game setting value and the number of virtual coins possessed by the player when the player's prediction is correct. . Thus, by determining the control target segment in the gaming machine 10 in consideration of the game setting value, the virtual coin possessed by the player, etc., it is possible to increase the difficulty of guessing the game setting value. Thereby, the above-mentioned effect in the case where the number of virtual coins necessary to be controlled is set according to the importance of the segments A to G can be enjoyed. Further, when the control target segment is determined in the gaming machine 10, it is conceivable that the control target segment is randomly determined in the gaming machine 10 by lottery. When randomly determining the control target segment by lottery, depending on the order of the determined control target segment, there may be a case where the game setting value can be estimated at an early stage. As a result, even if the number of jackpots is small, or even if the first jackpot is a regular jackpot (one-shot jackpot), it is possible to guess the game setting value candidates to a small number, which is disadvantageous for the game. Therefore, even in a situation where the interest of the player is reduced, the decrease in the interest of the player can be suppressed.

  Each segment selection image is displayed in one of a mode indicating that it is temporarily selected, a mode indicating that selection is possible, and a mode indicating that selection is not possible. For example, in the 4R round game screen (segment selection screen) shown in FIG. 45 (B), the segment A selection image (“segment A (5)”) is displayed more emphasized than the other segment selection images. The cursor image is attached to the left side and displayed in a manner indicating that it is temporarily selected. In addition, a segment B selected image (“segment B (50 images)”), a segment E selected image (“segment E (10 images)”), a segment F selected image (“segment F (30 images)”), and a segment G The selected image (“segment G (3 sheets)”) is displayed in a manner indicating that selection is impossible due to the strikethrough. Of the segment B selected image, the segment E selected image, the segment F selected image, and the segment G selected image, the segment B selected image and the segment F selected image are possessed by the player when the player's prediction is correct. The planned number of virtual coins is displayed in an unselectable manner because the number of virtual coins is less than the number of virtual coins necessary to make the segments B and F of the 7-segment display unit 39 turn on and off as control target segments (selected segments). The On the other hand, among the segment B selected image, the segment E selected image, the segment F selected image, and the segment G selected image, the segment E selected image and the segment G selected image are already controlled target segments that have already been turned on / off. Since it is a segment selection image for selecting the segment E and the segment G, it is displayed in an unselectable manner. In addition, the segment C selection image (“segment C (1 sheet)”) and the segment D selection image (“segment D (5 sheets)”) can be selected by being displayed differently from the other segment selection images. It is displayed in a mode indicating that it is.

  The segment non-selected image is selected when none of the segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39 is controlled to be turned on / off, and an image of “not selected” corresponds to it. Since the segment non-selection image can be selected regardless of the number of virtual coins possessed by the player and the already controlled segment, any of the mode indicating that it is temporarily selected and the mode indicating that it can be selected Is displayed. Since the 4R round game screen (segment selection screen) includes the segment non-selected image, an option of not selecting the segments A to G that are controlled to be turned on / off at the time of the predicted correct answer is added. Thus, the player can increase the number of virtual coins possessed by not selecting the segments A to G that are controlled to be turned on and off at the time of the predicted correct answer. For this reason, a segment (for example, segment B and F) that has a large number of virtual coins required to be turned on / off at the time of the correct answer and facilitates guessing of the game setting value is a target to be turned on / off at the time of the expected correct answer. As early as possible. In addition, since the player can decide not to select the segment to be controlled to be turned on / off at the time of the correct answer, the strategy for selecting the segment is diversified, and the interest of the game is improved.

<Step S2605>
Returning to FIG. 40, in step S2605 of the opening / closing execution mode effect determination process, the MPU 51 executes the 5R round game effect determination process. As the 5R round game effect, for example, an effect introduced by a character appearing in the variable game effect, a demonstration effect by the character, or the like is executed.

<Step S2606>
In step S2606, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the jackpot type is a 16R probability variable jackpot. Whether or not the 16R probability variation jackpot is determined can be determined by whether or not the 16R probability variation jackpot flag set to ON in step S2103 of the command determination process of FIG. 29 is set to ON. When the jackpot type is 16R probability variation jackpot (step S2606: Yes), the process proceeds to stage S2607. When the jackpot type is not 16R probability variation jackpot (step S2606: No), the opening / closing execution mode effect determination is performed. The process ends.

<Step S2607>
When the type of jackpot is a 16R probability variation jackpot (step S2605: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the 6R-16R round game effect determining process for determining the 6R-16R round game effect (step S2607). Then, the opening / closing execution mode effect determination process ends. As the 6R to 16R round game effects, for example, similar to the 5R round game effects, effects introduced by characters appearing in the variable game effects, demonstration effects by the characters, and the like are executed.

  In this way, in the opening / closing execution mode of jackpot game, the player is expected to predict an event that may occur in the progress of the game until the next jackpot game is executed, and possessed when the player correctly answers the prediction Based on the number of virtual coins to be selected, segments A to G to be controlled to be turned on / off in the next jackpot game are selected. When the player's prediction is correct, the segments A to G selected by the player in the opening / closing execution mode are turned on or off. Further, in the 7-segment display unit 39, the game setting value is clearly indicated or suggested by displaying all or part of the numbers corresponding to the game setting value in a specific color. That is, in the gaming machine 10, information for specifying or estimating the game setting value as a privilege when the player's prediction is correct in the event prediction game is displayed in the segments A to 7 on the 7-segment display unit 39 in the jackpot game. G can be obtained from the light-off state, and by correctly answering the prediction repeatedly in the event prediction game, it is possible to obtain highly accurate information necessary for estimating the game setting value. Identifiable information can be obtained. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can enjoy the progress of the game while confirming whether or not its own prediction is correct in the event prediction game that predicts an event that will occur in the future. . In addition to simply enjoying whether or not the prediction is correct in the event prediction game, the game setting is obtained by obtaining information for specifying or estimating the game setting value as a privilege when the prediction is correct. Since it is possible to enjoy the progress of the game while guessing the value, the interest of the game is further improved.

  Further, in the prediction game, when the player's prediction is correct, it is possible to select a segment that is turned on or off in a specific color according to his / her own intention. Thereby, the player can determine his / her own intention to specify or infer the game setting value. Therefore, the player determines the information necessary for determining whether or not to continue the game in the gaming machine 10 in the gaming machine, for example, whether the game setting value is high or low, or the possibility of a specific game setting value. It is possible to obtain information necessary for the determination based on its own criteria. As a result, it is possible to give the player the motivation to determine whether or not to continue the game in the gaming machine 10 in the game based on his / her judgment criteria based on the game setting value.

  In this embodiment, the timing at which the player predicts an event in the event prediction game is the 3R round game in the opening / closing execution mode in the jackpot game, but the event prediction timing is the other timing of the jackpot game, That is, it may be a round game other than the 3R round game in the opening / closing execution mode, an opening, or an ending. The event prediction timing may be over a plurality of round games, or may be a period from the opening to the round game, or from the round game to the ending. It is also conceivable to set the event prediction timing other than during the jackpot game.

  In this embodiment, the timing for notifying whether or not the player's prediction is correct in the event prediction game is the 1R round game in the opening / closing execution mode in the jackpot game. Other timings of jackpot games, that is, round games other than the 1R round game in the opening / closing execution mode, opening, and ending may be used. In addition, the notification timing of the expected correctness may be over a plurality of round games, or may be a period from the opening to the round game, or from the round game to the ending. It is also conceivable to set the notification timing of the expected correctness other than during the jackpot game.

  In this embodiment, the privilege presentation period for displaying the on / off state of the 7-segment display unit 39 on the symbol display unit 341 is the 2R round game in the opening / closing execution mode in the jackpot game. May be other timings of the jackpot game, that is, round games other than the 2R round game in the opening / closing execution mode, opening, and ending. Further, the privilege presentation timing may be over a plurality of round games, or may be a period from the opening to the round game, or from the round game to the ending. It is also conceivable to set the privilege presentation timing other than during the jackpot game.

  In the present embodiment, a bonus presentation period is set for each jackpot game. However, the bonus presentation period may be limited to a regular jackpot. In this case, the privilege presentation period may be any timing during the execution of the jackpot game, and can be set to various periods as in the case where the bonus presentation period is set for each jackpot game. Here, the jackpot renso is started with a chance jackpot game as a trigger, and is normally terminated with a jackpot game as a trigger. In this way, the normal jackpot triggers the end of the jackpot reaming, and if the first jackpot is a normal jackpot, the jackpot reaming is not started and becomes a one-shot jackpot. Therefore, the player is concerned that the interest of the game with respect to the jackpot game is reduced when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is usually a jackpot. In contrast, when the bonus presentation period is set to the normal jackpot game, information for specifying or estimating the game setting value in the normal jackpot game is obtained. As a result, it is possible to proceed with the normal jackpot game while expecting the content of the information related to the game setting value presented as a privilege. With normal jackpots at the jackpot renso, the greater the number of jackpot villas that have been held, the greater the expected value of the number of virtual coins that can be obtained. The feeling can be further improved. Thereby, the fall of the interest of the game with respect to a normal jackpot game can be suppressed.

  Note that, when the privilege presentation timing is set only during execution of the normal jackpot game, the player may be able to select segments A to G that can be controlled to be turned on / off on the 7-segment display unit 39. As described above, a segment that can be controlled to be turned on / off in the gaming machine 10 may be determined. If the segment that can be controlled to be turned on / off in the gaming machine 10 is determined as in the latter case, which segment A to G in the 7-segment display unit 39 is to be controlled before the normal jackpot game is executed. Since it cannot be determined whether it has become, the expectation with respect to the content of the information regarding the game setting value shown as a privilege can be improved further. Thereby, the fall of the interest of the game with respect to a normal jackpot game can further be suppressed.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the player's prediction is correct, the selection period of the segments A to G to be controlled to be turned on / off was the 4R round game in the open / close execution mode in the jackpot game. The selection periods A to G may be other timings of the jackpot game, that is, round games other than the 4R round game in the opening / closing execution mode, opening, and ending. In addition, the selection period of the segments A to G may extend over a plurality of round games, or may be a period continuous from the opening to the round game, or from the round game to the ending. It is also conceivable to set the selection timing other than during the jackpot game.

  In this embodiment, the selection period of the segments A to G can select one segment A to G, but the selection period of the segments A to G depends on the number of virtual coins possessed by the player. In this case, it may be possible to select a plurality of segments A to G to be controlled to be turned on / off at the time of a predicted correct answer. In this case, when the player's prediction is correct, a plurality of segments are turned on or off in a specific color in one jackpot game, so the player specifies or estimates a game setting value in one jackpot game. A plurality of information can be obtained. As a result, the player can obtain more information for specifying or estimating the game setting value even when the number of jackpot games is small. Even when the number of consecutive resorts is small, it is possible to specify the game setting value or to estimate the game setting value with higher accuracy.

[Standby processing]
Returning to the description of FIG. 28, in the standby state process (step S2005) of the sub timer interrupt process, the operation on the operation button 20, the selection button 21A or the determination button 21B is performed in the standby state in which neither the variable game nor the big hit game is executed. In response to this, the screen of the symbol display unit 341 is shifted, and processing for enabling various selections and settings by the player is executed. Here, FIG. 47 is a diagram showing an example of screen transition in the symbol display section in the standby state.

  As shown in FIG. 47, when the variation display of the decorative symbols is stopped, the variation of the decorative symbols is stopped when the number of holds N and the number of holds M are “0” and the game does not shift to the jackpot gaming state. The state change stop screen is maintained. Then, when the operation button 20 is operated by the player after the change stop screen is displayed, the display screen is shifted from the change stop screen to the top menu screen. The top menu screen includes a plurality of screen transition images and cursor images.

  The plurality of screen transfer images are images for selecting a transfer destination display screen, and include a plurality of selectable items (transfer destination display screen). Multiple screen transition images for game mode selection screen transition image for transition to game mode selection screen displayed as “game mode selection”, for event pre-change selection screen displayed for “event prediction selection” Event transition screen transition image, segment change screen transition image for transition to segment change screen displayed as “segment selection”, character selection screen transition for transition to character selection screen displayed as “character selection” An image, a character customization screen transition image for shifting to a character customization screen displayed as “character customization”, and a variation stop screen transition image for shifting to a variation stop screen displayed as “Return”.

  The cursor image is an image indicating which item of the plurality of selectable items is currently temporarily selected, and an item corresponding to the screen transition image on the right side of the cursor image among the plurality of screen transition images. The item is temporarily selected. The example shown in FIG. 47 indicates that “game mode selection” is provisionally selected. In addition, the screen transition image corresponding to the temporarily selected item among the plurality of screen transition images is displayed in a manner that can be distinguished from other screen transition images in order to emphasize the provisional selection. . The temporary selection item can be changed by operating the upper selection button 211 or the lower selection button 212.

  On the top menu screen, the provisionally selected item (transfer destination display screen) is determined by operating the determination button 21B, and the display screen corresponding to the item is transferred. For example, when the game mode selection screen transition image of “game mode selection” is selected by the player and the determination button 21B is operated, the display screen is shifted from the top menu screen to the game mode selection screen. Here, the game mode defines the inherent variable game effect in the variable game effect executed in the variable game as described above, and there are three game modes of game modes A to C in this embodiment ( (See FIGS. 32-34). In the present embodiment, the game mode can be selected by shifting from the top menu screen to the game mode selection screen in a standby state in which neither a variable game nor a jackpot game is executed. Specifically, the game mode selection screen includes an image of “game mode A”, an image of “game mode B”, and an image of “game mode C” for selecting a game mode. The game mode is selected by operating the decision button 21B after temporarily selecting the images of “game mode A”, “game mode B”, and “game mode C” by operating 211 or the lower selection button 212. Can do.

  Note that the change of the game mode may be performed during the variable game. For example, the game mode may be changed when the operation button 20 is operated in the variable game. In this case, when the operation button 20 is operated a plurality of times, for example, “game mode A” → The game modes A to C are changed in order as “game mode B” → “game mode C” → “game mode A”. However, when the operation request effect for the operation button 20 for executing the operation button effect is executed, and when the operation button effect is executed by performing an operation on the operation button 20 at this timing, the reach effect is executed. In such a case, the change of the game mode may be restricted.

  In addition, when the event prediction change screen transition image of “event prediction selection” is selected on the top menu screen, the display screen is shifted to the event prediction change screen, and the segment change screen transition image of “segment selection” is selected. In the case of a failure, the display screen is shifted to the segment change screen.

  Furthermore, on the top menu screen, when the character screen transition image of “Character selection” is selected, the display screen is shifted to the character selection screen, and when the character customization screen transition image of “Character customization” is selected, it is displayed. The screen is transferred to the character customization screen. That is, in the present embodiment, a character appearing in a variable game effect or the like can be selected, and the costume, accessories, hairstyle, etc. of the character can be customized. In such a gaming machine 10, it is also conceivable that an item that can customize a character as described above can be acquired as a privilege by correctly answering an event prediction game. In addition, as the privilege, it may be possible to add music to be output from the speaker 26 in a jackpot game or a short time mode. If the benefit of the event prediction game is an item for customization or addition of music, it is possible to improve interest in the event prediction game in order to acquire items and music, and as a result, it is possible to improve interest in games become.

  In addition, when the “return” variation stop screen transition image is selected on the top menu screen, the display screen is transitioned to the variation stop screen.

  By the way, in the present embodiment, as described above, an event prediction game is executed that predicts an event that may occur during the progress of the game. In this event prediction game, the player predicts an event that will occur in the future in the jackpot game (see FIG. 45A), and according to the number of virtual coins to be possessed when the prediction is correct, In the jackpot game, segments A to G that can be controlled to be turned on / off on the 7-segment display unit 39 that clearly or suggests the game setting value are selected (see FIG. 45B).

  However, when the current forecast or selected segment is forgotten, or the player after the change wants to confirm the forecast or selected segment, it may be assumed that the current forecast or selected segment is desired to be confirmed. It is also envisaged that they would like to change their current expectations and selected segments. For example, it may be possible to make a change because the prediction or selection segment in the jackpot game could not be performed according to his / her intention, or a case where the player after the change wishes to change when the player is changed. . As described above, it is assumed that the player desires to confirm or change the current prediction or the selected segment due to various circumstances. Therefore, in this embodiment, in order to enable confirmation and change of the current prediction and the selected segment, it is possible to check the current prediction on the condition that neither the floating game nor the jackpot game is executed. It is possible to shift to an event prediction change screen that can be changed and a segment change screen that enables confirmation and change of the selected segment. Note that confirmation or change of the current prediction or the selected segment may be made possible, for example, during execution of a floating game or a jackpot game other than the standby state.

  Here, FIG. 48A is an example of an event prediction change screen, and FIG. 48B is an example of a segment change screen.

  The event prediction change screen shown in FIG. 48 (A) is basically the same as the 3R round game screen (event prediction selection screen) (see FIG. 45 (A)) in the opening / closing execution mode in the jackpot game, but 3R While an image indicating that the game is an eye round game (characters of “ROUND3”) is omitted, an image of “end” is added.

  The segment change screen shown in FIG. 48 (B) is basically the same as the 4R round game screen (segment selection screen) (see FIG. 45 (B)) in the opening / closing execution mode in the jackpot game. An image indicating that the game is a round game (characters of “ROUND4”) is omitted, while an image of “END” is added.

  In the event prediction change screen and the segment change screen, the selection button 21B is selected after provisional selection is performed based on an option image corresponding to an item to be selected by operating the upper selection button 211 or the lower selection button 212. The item temporarily selected by can be selected. In each selection screen, the option image corresponding to the temporarily selected item is displayed with emphasis over the other option images. In this embodiment, the selection image is temporarily selected by displaying the cursor image on the left side. It is further emphasized that The “end” image added to the event prediction change screen and the segment change screen causes the display screen to be transferred from each change screen to the top menu screen. In other words, when “End” is selected on the event prediction change screen, the display screen is shifted from the event prediction change screen to the top menu screen, and when “End” is selected on the segment change screen, the display screen is changed to a segment. Moves from the screen to the top menu screen.

  Here, FIG. 49 and FIG. 50 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the standby state process executed in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. The standby state process will be described below with reference to FIGS. 49 and 50.

<Steps S2901 and S2902>
As shown in FIG. 49, in the standby state control process, the MPU 51 first determines whether or not it is in a standby state (steps S2901 and S2902). Specifically, the MPU 51 sets the variable game effect in-progress flag set to ON in step S2105 in the command determination process of FIG. 29 (step S2901: No), and in the jackpot game effect process of FIG. If the display variation pattern command is transmitted to the display control device 6 in step S2507 and the jackpot game effect in-progress flag is set to off (step S2902: No), it is determined to be in a standby state. On the other hand, the MPU 51 is not in the standby state when the variable game effect flag is set on (step S2901: Yes) or when the jackpot game effect flag is set on (step S2902: Yes). Judge.

  If the MPU 51 is in a standby state (No in steps S2901 and S2902), the process proceeds to step S2903. If the MPU 51 is not in a standby state (Yes in step S2901 or S2902), the standby state process ends.

<Step S2903>
When in the standby state (both steps S2901 and S2902 are No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the variable stop screen flag is set to ON (step S2903). The change stop screen flag is a flag indicating that the display screen on the symbol display unit 341 is a change stop screen. When the variable stop screen flag is shifted from the variable game state or the jackpot game state to the standby state, that is, when all the screen flags other than the variable stop screen flag are set to OFF in the standby state, FIG. Is turned on in step S2918, and is turned on when the display screen is shifted from the top menu screen to the change stop screen in the top menu screen processing in step S2909. The variation stop screen flag is set to OFF in step S2907 when the display screen is shifted from the variation stop screen to the top menu screen, and is set to OFF when the decorative symbol variation display is started.

  Then, when the variable stop screen flag is set on (step S2903: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2904, and when the variable stop screen flag is set off (step S2903: No). Then, the process proceeds to step S2908 in FIG.

<Step S2904>
When the fluctuation stop screen flag is set to on (step S2903: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the second operation pattern flag is set to on (step S2904). The second operation pattern flag is a flag indicating that an operation on the operation button 20 has been started, and is set to ON in step S2407 in the operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the operation button 20 has been operated when the display screen is a change stop screen. Then, when the second operation pattern flag is set on (step S2904: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2905, and when the second operation pattern flag is set off (step S2904: No), the standby state process ends.

<Steps S2905 to S2907>
When the second operation pattern flag is set to ON (step S2904: YES), the MPU 51 changes the display screen from the change stop screen (see FIG. 47) to the top menu screen (see FIG. 47) for performing various selections and settings. (Step S2905). That is, the MPU 51 shifts the display screen from the change stop screen to the top menu screen when the operation button 20 is operated when the display screen is the change display screen.

  Then, the MPU 51 sets the top menu screen flag indicating that the display screen is the top menu screen (step S2906), and sets the variation stop screen flag indicating that the display screen is the variation stop screen to OFF (step S2906). S2907), the standby state process is terminated.

<Step S2908>
When the variable stop screen flag is set to off (step S2903: No), as illustrated in FIG. 50, the MPU 51 determines whether the top menu screen flag indicating that the display screen is the top menu screen is set to on. Is determined (step S2908). The top menu screen flag is set to ON when the display screen is shifted from the various screens such as the change stop screen to the top menu screen in the standby state (for example, step S2906 in FIG. 49). If the top menu screen flag is set on (step S2908: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2909. If the top menu screen flag is set off (step S2908: No), the MPU 51 performs the process. The process shifts to S2910.

<Step S2909>
When the top menu screen flag is set to ON (step S2908: Yes), the MPU 51 executes a top menu screen process (step S2909). In the top menu screen process, the temporarily selected items are changed according to the operation on the selection button 21A. In the top menu screen processing, the display screen is shifted to a screen corresponding to an item temporarily selected when an operation is performed on the determination button 21B, for example, a game mode selection screen, an event prediction change screen, a segment change screen, or the like. . In addition, when the display screen is transferred from the top menu screen to another screen, the MPU 51 sets the screen flag for the transfer destination screen to ON and sets the top menu screen flag to OFF.

  As described above, in the top menu screen process executed in the standby state, the display screen can be changed from the top menu screen to the event prediction change screen. Therefore, the player can check the predicted event type and can also check the current prediction for the predicted event (see FIG. 48A). This allows the player to confirm the expected event and the current forecast for the forecast event, for example, if the forecast event or current forecast is forgotten, or if the player is replaced, Can be confirmed in the standby state. As a result, the player can surely grasp the predicted event and the current prediction, and can enjoy the progress of the game while expecting the predicted event to occur as the current prediction occurs in the progress of the game.

  In the top menu screen processing, the display screen can be changed from the top menu screen to the segment change screen. Therefore, the player can confirm the selected segment. Thereby, when the player wants to confirm the selected segment, for example, when the selected segment is forgotten or when the player is changed, the selected segment can be confirmed in the standby state. As a result, the player can surely grasp the segment to be noted when the prediction in the event prediction game is correct.

  In particular, in the standby state, the display screen is changed from the event prediction change screen or the segment change screen unless a player performs an intentional screen transition operation unless a floating game is executed by launching a game ball. There is no transition to other screens such as the top menu screen. Therefore, a player must be careful and polite to spend his or her own time at his own pace, without the time constraints of determining his own predictions or selected segments in a round game of jackpot games. And selected segments.

<Step S2910>
When the top menu screen flag is set to off (step S2908: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the game mode selection screen flag indicating that the display screen is the game mode selection screen is set to on. (Step S2910). The game mode selection screen flag is set to ON when the display screen is shifted from the top menu screen to the game mode selection screen in the top menu screen processing in step S2909. When the game mode selection screen flag is set on (step S2910: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2911, and when the game mode selection screen flag is set off (step S2910: No), the process is performed. The process moves to step S2912.

<Step S2911>
When the game mode selection screen flag is set to ON (step S2910: Yes), the MPU 51 executes a game mode selection process. Details of the game mode selection process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S2912>
When the game mode selection screen flag is set to OFF (step S2910: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the prediction change screen flag indicating that the display screen is the event prediction change screen is set to ON. (Step S2912). The prediction change screen flag is set to ON when the display screen is shifted from the top menu screen to the event prediction change screen in the top menu screen processing in step S2909. When the prediction change screen flag is set on (step S2912: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2913, and when the prediction change screen flag is set off (step S2912: No), the processing The process proceeds to step S2914.

<Step S2913>
When the prediction selection screen flag is set to ON (step S2912: Yes), the MPU 51 executes a prediction change process. Details of the forecast change process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S2914>
When the prediction selection screen flag is set to off (step S2912: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the segment change screen flag indicating that the display screen is the segment change screen is set to on ( Step S2914). The segment change screen flag is set to ON when the display screen is shifted from the top menu screen to the segment change screen in the top menu screen processing in step S2909. If the segment change screen flag is set on (step S2914: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2915. If the segment change screen flag is set off (step S2914: No), the process proceeds to step S2916. Migrate to

<Step S2915>
When the segment change screen flag is set to ON (step S2914: Yes), the MPU 51 executes a segment change process. Details of the segment change process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Steps S2916 and S2917>
When the segment change screen flag is set to off (step S2914: No), the MPU 51 determines whether another screen flag (character selection screen flag or character customization screen flag) is set to on ( Step S2916). The other screen flag is set to ON when the display screen is shifted from the top menu screen to another screen in the top menu screen processing in step S2909. If the other screen flag is set to ON (step S2916: Yes), other screen processing corresponding to the other screen is executed (step S2917), and the standby state processing is terminated. On the other hand, when the other screen flag is set to OFF (step S2916: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2918.

<Step S2918>
When the other screen flag is set to off (step S2916: No), the MPU 51 sets the fluctuation stop screen flag to on (step S2918), and ends the standby state process. That is, when all the screen flags are also off when the MPU 51 is in the standby state, the MPU 51 shifts from the variable gaming state or the jackpot gaming state to the standby state, and can determine that the display screen is the variable stop screen. Set the stop screen flag on.

[Game mode selection process]
The game mode selection process executed in step S2911 is a process executed when the display screen is a game mode selection screen. In this game mode selection process, items (game modes A to C) that are provisionally selected are changed in accordance with an operation on the selection button 21A. Further, in the game mode selection process, when an operation on the determination button 21B is performed when an item corresponding to any of the game modes A to C is temporarily selected, the game modes A to C stored in the RMA 512 are temporarily set. Update to the selected game mode A-C. Further, in the game mode selection process, when “end” is provisionally selected and the operation is performed on the determination button 21B, the display screen is shifted from the game mode selection screen to the top menu screen. Here, FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the game mode selection process executed in the standby state process of FIG. Hereinafter, the game mode selection process will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S3001>
As shown in FIG. 51, in the game mode selection process, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the second upper selection pattern flag is set to ON (step S3001). The second upper selection pattern flag is a flag indicating that an operation on the upper selection button 211 has started, and an upper selection operation detection executed in the selection operation detection pattern determination process in step S2204 in the operation detection process of FIG. Set to ON in the pattern determination process. When the second upper selection pattern flag is set on (step S3001: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3002, and when the second upper selection pattern flag is set off (step S3001: No), the process proceeds to step S3003.

<Step S3002>
When the second upper selection pattern flag is set to ON (step S3001: Yes), the MPU 51 executes a process of changing the temporarily selected item (temporary selection display) on the game mode selection screen to the upper side. For example, if “game mode B” is provisionally selected before the second upper selection pattern flag is set to ON, the provisional selection display is changed to “game mode A” (see FIG. 47). In addition, when the “gaming mode A” displayed on the uppermost side of the option images is temporarily selected, if an operation is performed on the upper selection button 211, the temporary selection display may not be changed. The temporary selection display may be changed to “end” displayed at the bottom of the option images (see FIG. 47).

<Step S3003>
When the second upper selection pattern flag is set to off (step S3001: No), that is, when the operation on the upper selection button 211 is not started, the MPU 51 sets the second lower selection pattern flag to on. It is determined whether or not there is (step S3003). The second lower selection pattern flag is a flag indicating that an operation on the lower selection button 212 is started, and the lower selection operation detection executed in the selection operation detection pattern determination process in step S2204 in the operation detection process of FIG. Set to ON in the pattern determination process. When the second lower selection pattern flag is set on (step S3003: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3004, and when the second lower selection pattern flag is set off (step S3003: No), the process proceeds to step S3005.

<Step S3004>
When the second lower selection pattern flag is set to ON (step S3003: Yes), the MPU 51 executes a process of changing the temporarily selected item (temporary selection display) on the game mode selection screen to the lower side. . For example, if “game mode A” is provisionally selected before the second lower selection pattern flag is set to ON, the provisional selection display is changed to “game mode B” (see FIG. 47). In addition, when “end” displayed at the bottom of the option images is temporarily selected, when the operation is performed on the lower selection button 212, the temporary selection display may not be changed. The temporary selection display may be changed to “game mode A” displayed on the uppermost side of the image (see FIG. 47).

<Step S3005>
When the second lower selection pattern flag is set to off (step S3003: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the second determination operation pattern flag is set to on (step S3005). The second determination operation pattern flag is a flag indicating that an operation on the determination button 21B has started, and is set to ON in the determination button operation detection pattern determination process executed in step S2206 in the operation detection process of FIG. The That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not an operation has been performed on the decision button 21B when the display screen is a game mode selection screen. Then, when the second determination operation pattern flag is set on (step S3005: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3006, and when the second determination operation pattern flag is set off (step) S3005: No), the standby state process is terminated.

<Step S3006>
When the second determination operation pattern flag is set to ON (step S3005: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item temporarily selected when the determination button 21B is operated is “end”. (Step S3006). The MPU 51 moves the process to step S3007 when the item temporarily selected when the determination button 21B is operated is “End” (step S3006: Yes), and when the determination button 21B is operated. If the selected item is not “end” (step S3006: No), the process proceeds to step S3010.

<Steps S3007 to S3009>
If the item temporarily selected when the enter button 21B is operated is “end” (step S3006: Yes), the MPU 51 displays various selections from the game mode selection screen (see FIG. 47). A transition is made to the top menu screen (see FIG. 47) for setting (step S3007). Then, the MPU 51 sets the top menu screen flag indicating that the display screen is the top menu screen (step S3008), and sets the game mode selection screen flag indicating that the display screen is the game mode selection screen to OFF. (Step S3009), the standby state process is terminated.

<Step S3010>
When the item temporarily selected when the determination button 21B is operated is not “end” (step S3006: No), the MPU 51 operates the determination button 21B as the game modes A to C stored in the RAM 512. In this case, the temporarily selected game modes A to C are stored, and the standby state process is terminated. That is, when the enter button 21B is operated, the MPU 51 determines that the game mode A is temporarily selected if the game mode A is temporarily selected, the game mode B is temporarily selected if the game mode B is temporarily selected, and the game mode C is temporarily selected. If selected, the game mode C is stored in the RAM 512. Note that the game modes A to C stored in the RAM 512 are referred to when a variable game effect (effect pattern) is determined in step S2103 in the command determination process of FIG.

[Expected change processing]
The prediction change process executed in step S2913 in FIG. 50 is a process executed when the display screen is an event prediction change screen (see FIG. 48A). In this prediction change process, the temporarily selected items are changed according to the operation on the selection button 21A. Further, in the prediction change process, when “end” is provisionally selected and the operation is performed on the determination button 21B, the display screen is shifted from the prediction change screen to the top menu screen. Further, in the prediction change process, when an operation on the determination button 21B is performed when an item other than “end” is selected, the player's prediction stored in the RMA 512 is updated to the provisionally selected option. Here, FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the prediction change process executed in the standby state process of FIG. Hereinafter, the prediction change process will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S3101>
As shown in FIG. 52, in the prediction change process, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the second upper selection pattern flag is set to ON (step S3101). The second upper selection pattern flag is a flag indicating that an operation on the upper selection button 211 has started, and an upper selection operation detection executed in the selection operation detection pattern determination process in step S2204 in the operation detection process of FIG. Set to ON in the pattern determination process. When the second upper selection pattern flag is set on (step S3101: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3102, and when the second upper selection pattern flag is set off (step S3101: No), the process proceeds to step S3103.

<Step S3102>
When the second upper selection pattern flag is set to ON (step S3101: Yes), the MPU 51 executes a process of changing the temporarily selected item (temporary selection display) on the event prediction change screen to the upper side. For example, if “Super (3 sheets)” is temporarily selected before the second upper selection pattern flag is set to ON, the temporary selection display is changed to “Normal (10 sheets)” (FIG. 48 (A)). If “normal (10)” displayed on the uppermost side of the option images is temporarily selected and the operation is performed on the upper selection button 211, the temporary selection display may not be changed. Then, the temporary selection display may be changed to “end” displayed at the bottom of the option images (see FIG. 48A).

<Step S3103>
When the second upper selection pattern flag is set to OFF (step S3101: No), that is, when the operation on the upper selection button 211 is not started, the MPU 51 sets the second lower selection pattern flag to ON. It is determined whether or not (step S3103). The second lower selection pattern flag is a flag indicating that an operation on the lower selection button 212 is started, and the lower selection operation detection executed in the selection operation detection pattern determination process in step S2204 in the operation detection process of FIG. Set to ON in the pattern determination process. When the second lower selection pattern flag is set on (step S3103: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3104, and when the second lower selection pattern flag is set off (step S3103: No), the process proceeds to step S3105.

<Step S3104>
When the second lower selection pattern flag is set to ON (step S3103: Yes), the MPU 51 executes a process of changing the temporarily selected item (temporary selection display) on the event change selection screen to the lower side. . For example, if “normal (10 sheets)” is provisionally selected before the second lower selection pattern flag is set to ON, the provisional selection display is changed to “super (3 sheets)” (FIG. 48 (A)). If “end” displayed at the bottom of the option images is temporarily selected and the operation is performed on the lower selection button 212, the temporary selection display may not be changed. The temporary selection display may be changed to “normal (10)” displayed on the uppermost side of the image (see FIG. 48A).

<Step S3105>
When the second lower selection pattern flag is set to off (step S3103: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the second determination operation pattern flag is set to on (step S3105). The second determination operation pattern flag is a flag indicating that an operation on the determination button 21B has started, and is set to ON in the determination button operation detection pattern determination process executed in step S2206 in the operation detection process of FIG. The That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not an operation has been performed on the decision button 21B when the display screen is an event prediction selection screen. Then, when the second determination operation pattern flag is set to on (step S3105: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3106, and when the second determination operation pattern flag is set to off (step) S3105: No), the standby state process is terminated.

<Step S3106>
When the second determination operation pattern flag is set to ON (step S3105: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item temporarily selected when the determination button 21B is operated is “end”. (Step S3106). The MPU 51 moves the process to step S3107 when the item temporarily selected when the determination button 21B is operated is “End” (step S3106: Yes), and when the determination button 21B is operated. If the selected item is not “end” (step S3106: No), the process proceeds to step S3110.

<Steps S3107 to S3109>
When the item temporarily selected when the OK button 21B is operated is “end” (step S3106: Yes), the MPU 51 displays the event change selection screen (see FIGS. 47 and 48A). To the top menu screen (see FIG. 47) for performing various selections and settings (step S3107). Then, the MPU 51 sets the top menu screen flag indicating that the display screen is the top menu screen (step S3108), and sets the event prediction change screen flag indicating that the display screen is the event prediction change screen to OFF. (Step S3109), the standby state process is terminated.

<Step S3110>
When the item temporarily selected when the determination button 21B is operated is not “end” (step S3106: No), the MPU 51 determines that the determination button 21B is operated as a player's prediction stored in the RAM 512. The reach effect corresponding to the item temporarily selected is stored (updated) in the RAM 512. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 48A, when the option temporarily selected when the enter button 21B is operated is “normal (10)”, the game for the final variation effect at the time of the big hit Normal reach production is memorized as a person's expectation. That is, when the determination button 21B is operated, the MPU 51 performs a normal effect if the normal is temporarily selected, a super reach effect if the super is temporarily selected, and a special if the special is temporarily selected. Reach is stored in RAM 512 as a player's expectation. Note that the player's prediction stored in the RAM 512 is referred to in order to determine the 1R round game effect in the 1R round game effect determination process of the jackpot game effect process of FIG.

  As described above, in the prediction change process executed in the standby state, the player's prediction can be changed when the display screen is the event prediction change screen. As a result, if the player wishes to change the current prediction, for example, if the player wishes to change because the prediction could not be made according to his intention in the jackpot game, or if the player has changed, In a case where the player desires to change, the current prediction can be changed to his / her desired prediction, and the gaming machine 10 can flexibly cope with the player's prediction. In particular, in the standby state, unless the game is performed by launching a game ball, the display screen changes from the event prediction change screen to the top menu screen, etc., unless the player performs an intentional screen transition operation. There is no transition to another screen. Therefore, a player must change and determine his / her predictions at his / her own pace carefully and carefully without being limited by the time constraints of determining his / her predictions in a round game of jackpot game. Can do.

[Segment change processing]
The segment change process executed in step S2915 of FIG. 50 is a process executed when the display screen is a segment change screen (see FIG. 48B). In this segment change process, the temporarily selected items are changed according to the operation on the selection button 21A. Also, in the segment change process, when “end” is provisionally selected and an operation is performed on the enter button 21B, the display screen is shifted from the segment change screen to the top menu screen. Further, in the segment change process, when an operation other than the “end” item is selected and an operation is performed on the determination button 21B, the selected segment stored in the RMA 512 is updated to the temporarily selected segment. Here, FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the segment change process executed in the standby state process of FIG. Hereinafter, the segment change process will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S3201>
As shown in FIG. 53, in the segment change process, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the second upper selection pattern flag is set to ON (step S3201). The second upper selection pattern flag is a flag indicating that an operation on the upper selection button 211 has started, and an upper selection operation detection executed in the selection operation detection pattern determination process in step S2204 in the operation detection process of FIG. Set to ON in the pattern determination process. When the second upper selection pattern flag is set on (step S3201: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3202, and when the second upper selection pattern flag is set off (step S3201: No), the process proceeds to step S3203.

<Step S3202>
If the second upper selection pattern flag is set to ON (step S3201: Yes), the MPU 51 executes processing for changing the temporarily selected item (temporary selection display) on the segment selection screen to the upper side. For example, if “segment D (5 sheets)” is provisionally selected before the second upper selection pattern flag is set to ON, the provisional selection display is changed to “segment C (1 sheet)”. (See FIG. 48B). If the upper option is not selectable, the unselectable option is skipped. Further, when “upper selection button 211” is operated when “segment A (five)” displayed on the uppermost side of the selection images is temporarily selected, the provisional selection display may not be changed. Alternatively, the temporary selection display may be changed to “end” displayed at the bottom of the option images (see FIG. 48B).

<Step S3203>
When the second upper selection pattern flag is set to OFF (step S3201: No), that is, when the operation on the upper selection button 211 is not started, the MPU 51 sets the second lower selection pattern flag to ON. It is determined whether or not (step S3203). The second lower selection pattern flag is a flag indicating that an operation on the lower selection button 212 is started, and the lower selection operation detection executed in the selection operation detection pattern determination process in step S2204 in the operation detection process of FIG. Set to ON in the pattern determination process. When the second lower selection pattern flag is set to on (step S3203: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3204, and when the second lower selection pattern flag is set to off (step S3203: No), the process proceeds to step S3205.

<Step S3204>
When the second lower selection pattern flag is set to ON (step S3203: Yes), the MPU 51 executes a process of changing the temporarily selected item (temporary selection display) on the segment selection screen to the lower side. For example, if “segment C (1 sheet)” is provisionally selected before the second lower selection pattern flag is set to ON, the provisional selection display is changed to “segment D (5 sheets)”. (See FIG. 48B). If the lower option is not selectable, the option that cannot be selected is skipped. In addition, when “end” displayed at the bottom of the option images is temporarily selected and the operation is performed on the lower selection button 212, the temporary selection display may not be changed. The temporary selection display may be changed to “segment A (5)” displayed on the uppermost side of the image (see FIG. 48B).

<Step S3205>
When the second lower selection pattern flag is set to off (step S3203: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the second determination operation pattern flag is set to on (step S3205). The second determination operation pattern flag is a flag indicating that an operation on the determination button 21B has started, and is set to ON in the determination button operation detection pattern determination process executed in step S2206 in the operation detection process of FIG. The That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not an operation has been performed on the enter button 21B when the display screen is a segment selection screen. Then, when the second determination operation pattern flag is set to ON (step S3205: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3206, and when the second determination operation pattern flag is set to OFF (step S3205). S3205: No), the standby state process is terminated.

<Step S3206>
When the second determination operation pattern flag is set to ON (step S3205: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item temporarily selected when the determination button 21B is operated is “end”. (Step S3206). If the item temporarily selected when the enter button 21B is operated is “end” (step S3206: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3207, and if the enter button 21B is operated, If the selected item is not “end” (step S3206: NO), the process proceeds to step S3210.

<Steps S3207 to S3209>
When the item temporarily selected when the enter button 21B is operated is “end” (step S3206: Yes), the MPU 51 displays various display screens from the segment change screen (see FIG. 48B). The top menu screen (see FIG. 47) for selection and setting is displayed (step S3207). Then, the MPU 51 sets the top menu screen flag indicating that the display screen is the top menu screen (step S3208), and sets the segment change screen flag indicating that the display screen is the segment change screen to OFF (step S3208). S3209), the standby state process is terminated.

<Step S3210>
If the item temporarily selected when the enter button 21B is operated is not “end” (step S3206: No), the MPU 51 temporarily selects the selected segment stored in the RMA 512 when the enter button 21B is operated. The options corresponding to the selected segment image are stored in the RAM 512, and the standby state process is terminated. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 48B, when the option temporarily selected when the enter button 21B is operated is “segment A (5)”, the segment A is selected as the selected segment. Are stored in the RAM 512 as selected segments. Note that the selected segment stored in the RAM 512 is referred to in order to determine the 2R round game effect in the 2R round game effect determination process of the jackpot game effect process of FIG.

  As described above, in the segment change process executed in the standby state, the selected segment can be changed when the display screen is the segment change screen. As a result, when the player wishes to change the selected segment, for example, in the jackpot game, he / she wishes to change the segment because he / she could not select the segment that can be controlled to be turned on / off at the time of the expected correct answer, In the case where the player who has changed is desired to change when the player is changed, the selected segment can be changed to the segment desired by the player, and the selected segment of the player in the gaming machine 10 can be changed. It is possible to respond flexibly to decisions. In particular, in the standby state, unless the game is executed by launching a game ball, the display screen changes from the segment change screen to the top menu screen, except when the player performs an intentional screen transition operation. Will not be transferred to the screen. Therefore, the player can determine the selected segment at his / her own pace carefully and carefully without being limited in time as in the case of determining the selected segment in the round game of the jackpot game. .

  As described above, in this embodiment, an event prediction game is executed that predicts an event that may occur during the progress of the game. In this event prediction game, the player predicts an event that will occur in the future in the jackpot game, and in the jackpot game, the game setting value is set according to the number of virtual coins to be possessed when the prediction is correct. Segments A to G that can be controlled to be turned on and off in the 7-segment display section 39 that are explicitly or suggested are selected. That is, in the gaming machine 10, information for estimating the game setting value as a privilege when the player's prediction is correct in the event prediction game is used for each segment A to G in the 7-segment display unit 39 in the jackpot game. It can be obtained from the on / off state, and by correctly answering the prediction repeatedly in the event prediction game, it is possible to obtain highly accurate information necessary for inferring the game setting value, and finally the game setting can be specified. Information can be obtained. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can enjoy the progress of the game while confirming whether or not its own prediction is correct in an event prediction game that predicts an event that will occur in the future. . In addition to simply enjoying whether or not the prediction is correct in the event prediction game, information for estimating the game setting value as a benefit when the prediction is correct can be obtained. Since it is possible to enjoy the progress of the game while guessing, the interest of the game is further improved.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the event prediction game, it is possible to select a selection segment that is turned on or off in a specific color when the player's prediction is correct, according to his / her own intention. Thereby, the player can determine information for estimating the game setting value with his / her own intention. Therefore, the player needs information for determining whether or not to continue the game in the gaming machine 10, for example, the level of the game setting value and the possibility of a specific game setting value. Information can be obtained based on its own criteria. As a result, it is possible to give the player a motivation to determine whether or not to continue the game on the gaming machine 10 based on his / her own judgment standard based on the game setting value.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the expected event type provided in the event prediction game, and the prediction and selected segment determined by the player for the predicted event type can be confirmed on the symbol display unit 341 in the standby state. As a result, if the player wants to confirm the expected event type, the current prediction for the expected event type, and the selected segment that will be controlled to be turned off when the expected correct answer, for example, if the player has forgotten the predicted event, the current prediction or the selected segment When the player is changed, the expected event, the current prediction, and the selected segment can be confirmed in the standby state. As a result, the player can surely grasp the expected event type, current prediction, and selected segment, so that the player can enjoy whether or not the predicted event occurs as expected in the progress of the game. It is possible to enjoy whether the selected segment is turned on or off with a specific color by paying attention.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, the expected event type presented in the event prediction game, and the prediction or selected segment determined by the player for the predicted event type can be changed in the symbol display unit 341 in the standby state. As a result, if the player wishes to change the current prediction or selected segment, for example, if the player wishes to change because the prediction could not be made according to his intention in the jackpot game, or if the player has changed In a case where the player after the change wants to change, it is possible to change to the prediction or selection segment desired by the player, and the gaming machine 10 can flexibly cope with the player's prediction.

  In particular, in the standby state, the display screen is changed from the event prediction change screen or the segment change screen unless a player performs an intentional screen transition operation unless a floating game is executed by launching a game ball. There is no transition to other screens such as the top menu screen. Therefore, the player must be careful and polite and spend his time at his own pace, without the time constraints of determining the current prediction or selection segment in the jackpot game round game. And the selected segment can be confirmed and changed.

  In this embodiment, the event prediction game causes the player to predict an event that occurs during the jackpot game, and when the player's prediction is correct, a bonus is given to the player in the jackpot game. A game is a game that allows a player to predict an event that occurs in a jackpot game, determines whether the player's prediction is correct or not in the jackpot game, and then grants a privilege in the jackpot game if the prediction by the player is correct It may be. That is, the event prediction game may be a game that is completed in one jackpot game, in other words, a game that is executed specially during the jackpot game. As described above, since the event prediction game is a game that is specially executed during the jackpot game, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the jackpot game in which the player's interest tends to decrease.

  In this embodiment, the privilege given to the player in the event prediction game is information for specifying or estimating the game setting value. The privilege relates to, for example, the profit state of the player in the progress of the game. It may be information for specifying or estimating the appearance performance other than the game set value. Examples of the ball performance include the ball performance based on the winning openings 313 to 316, the expected ball output value (for example, the total number of game balls to be launched when a certain number of game balls (for example, 60,000 balls) are launched (total out balls) The ratio of the expected number of balls (number of payout game balls) to the number).

  Here, when the benefit when the prediction in the event prediction game is correct is information for specifying or inferring the ball performance based on the prize mouths 313 to 316, the player is, for example, an individual at the time of manufacturing the gaming machine 10 It becomes possible to specify or estimate the ball performance that reflects the variation in the winning performance for the winning ports 313 to 316 between the gaming machines due to the difference or the secular change. As a result, the player enjoys guessing the ball performance based on the winning ports 313 to 316, and if the ball performance based on the winning ports 313 to 316 can be specified, the gaming machine in the game based on the performance information An opportunity to decide whether to continue the game at 10 is granted.

  In addition, as the performance of winning the ball based on the winning openings 313 to 316, the number of lottery per unit jackpot, the base, the continuous character ratio, the character ratio, and the like can be cited.

  The unit jackpot lottery count is an index indicating the ease of receiving the jackpot lottery in the normal gaming state (in the low probability mode and not in the high frequency support mode), so there is information for specifying or estimating the unit jackpot lottery count. By being given as a privilege in the event prediction game, it becomes possible to know the easiness of receiving a big hit lottery. Thereby, the player enjoys guessing the number of lottery per unit jackpot, and if the number of lottery per unit jackpot can be specified, the player determines whether to continue the game with the gaming machine being played based on the number of lottery per unit jackpot. An opportunity is granted.

  Since the base is an index indicating the ease of winning a prize to the first prize opening 314 and the general prize opening 313, information for specifying or estimating the base is given as a privilege in the event prediction game, It becomes possible to know the ease of winning a prize to the first prize opening 314 and the general prize opening 313. Thereby, the player enjoys guessing of the base, and when the base can be specified, the player is given an opportunity to determine whether to continue the game with the gaming machine being played based on the base.

  The ratio of consecutive bonuses is the frequency at which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery shifts to the jackpot gaming state (the ratio of staying in the jackpot gaming state), and the ease of winning a prize to the variable winning opening 316 (in the jackpot gaming state) This is an index indicating the rate of appearance. Therefore, the player can specify or guess the continuous character ratio by giving information for specifying or estimating the continuous character ratio as a privilege in the event prediction game, so in the jackpot lottery It is possible to know the frequency at which the lottery result shifts to the big win gaming state and the ease of winning the winning in the variable winning opening 316. Thereby, the player enjoys guessing of the continuous character ratio, and if the continuous character ratio can be specified, the player determines whether to continue the game with the gaming machine in the game based on the continuous character ratio. An opportunity is granted.

  The bonus rate is the frequency at which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery shifts to the jackpot gaming state (stay rate in the jackpot gaming state), the stay rate in the high frequency support mode that receives the support of the electric bonus 315b, and the variable prize It is an index indicating the ease of winning a prize to the mouth 316 and the second winning prize opening 315 (the payout rate in the jackpot gaming state). Therefore, the player can specify or guess the bonus rate by giving the information for specifying or guessing the bonus rate as a privilege in the event prediction game, so the lottery result in the jackpot lottery To know the frequency at which the game will shift to the jackpot gaming state, the staying rate in the high-frequency support mode receiving support from the electric accessory 315b, and the ease of winning in the variable winning port 316 and the second winning port 315 Is possible. This gives the player an opportunity to enjoy the guess of the ratio of the bonuses and, if the bonus rate can be specified, to determine whether to continue the game on the gaming machine based on the bonuses ratio. Is done.

  On the other hand, in the case where information for specifying or estimating the expected appearance value is given as a privilege in the event prediction game, in addition to the output performance based on the game setting value, the state of the nail placed on the game board 31 In addition, it is possible to evaluate the appearance performance in consideration of the surface properties of the game board 31. Therefore, when a player is given information for specifying or estimating the expected appearance value as a privilege in the event prediction game as a privilege in the event prediction game. It is possible to more appropriately identify or recognize the game play performance of the gaming machine 10. Moreover, even if an expected ball expected value is given as a privilege in an event prediction game as information for specifying or estimating a fullness rate for the border line (the expected ball expected value is 100% = the difference ball number is 0 ball) Good.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the player's prediction is correct in the event prediction game, information for specifying or estimating the game setting value is given as a privilege based on the virtual value such as virtual coins. A privilege may be given without using a virtual value such as a virtual coin.

[Summary of Invention]
Hereinafter, the outline of the invention extracted from the above-described embodiment will be additionally described. In addition, in order to provide an understanding of the correspondence between each supplementary note and the embodiment, it may be described with a reference numeral for convenience, but the invention according to the supplementary note is limited to a specific configuration with the reference sign. is not. It is also possible to select and arbitrarily combine each configuration and each processing function described below.

[Appendix A1]
Item presenting means (341) for presenting the player with the plurality of items for causing the player to select at least one item from among a plurality of items relating to events that may occur during the progress of the game in a predetermined period;
Benefit granting means (51) for giving a reward to a player when an event corresponding to a selection item selected by the player from the plurality of items presented by the item presenting means (341) occurs in the predetermined period. )When,
A gaming machine comprising:

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A1, a player can predict an event that may occur during the progress of the game in a predetermined period, and a privilege is given when the player's prediction is correct. Therefore, the player can expect an event occurring in a predetermined period and enjoy whether or not the prediction is correct. Then, when the player's prediction is correct, the privilege is given, so that not only interest in the event prediction but also interest in the privilege is added, so the interest in the game is improved.

[Appendix A2]
A transition determination means (41) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state in which a special game advantageous to the player (a jackpot game) is executed based on establishment of the determination condition;
The gaming machine according to appendix A1, wherein the start of the predetermined period is set after the end of the special game.

  In the gaming machine according to Appendix A2, the start of the predetermined period is set after the end of the special game. In this way, by setting the start of the predetermined period after the end of the special game, an event that can occur after the end of the special game is targeted for prediction. Therefore, by setting the start of a predetermined period after the end of the special game, it is possible to present a plurality of items to the player with the item presenting means using the special game. Here, during a period when the special game is not executed, the transition determination unit performs the transition determination based on the establishment of the determination condition, and notifies the result of the transition determination. Therefore, by using a special game to present a plurality of items to the player with the item presenting means, it is possible to prevent the notification of the result for the transition determination from being hindered.

[Appendix A3]
The gaming machine according to appendix A2, wherein the end of the predetermined period is set before the start of the special game.

  In the gaming machine according to Appendix A3, the end of the predetermined period is set before the start of the special game. By setting the end of the predetermined period to the start of the special game in this way, the predetermined period is set between the special games. Then, by setting the predetermined period between special games, it is possible to present a plurality of items to the player using the item presenting means using the special game. Thus, by presenting a plurality of items to the player by the item presenting means using the special game, it is possible to prevent the notification of the result for the transition determination due to the presentation of the plurality of items.

[Appendix A4]
The item presentation period in which the plurality of items are presented by the item presentation unit (341) is set to a period in which the special game is executed, The gaming machine according to attachment A2 or attachment A3,

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A4, the item presentation period in which a plurality of items related to the event are presented by the item presentation unit is set to a period in which the special game is executed. Thus, by setting the item presentation period in the period in which the special game is executed, the item desired by the player can be selected from a plurality of items using the period in which the special game is executed. Thereby, since the player can select an item desired by the player from a plurality of items using the special game, it is possible to prevent the notification of the result regarding the transition determination by the selection of the item by the player.

[Appendix A5]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendix A2 to appendix A4, wherein a bonus grant period for granting the bonus to a player is set to a period during which the special game is executed.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A5, a privilege grant period for granting a privilege to a player is set to a period during which a special game is executed. In this way, by setting the privilege grant period during the period in which the special game is executed, the privilege can be given to the player using the period in which the special game is executed. Thereby, since a privilege can be given to a player using a special game, it is possible to prevent the notification of the result for the transition determination due to the grant of the privilege from being hindered.

[Appendix A6]
A state transition means (41) for shifting from the special gaming state to a determination state in which the transition determination is executed by the transition determination means (41);
The determination state includes a first determination state (low probability mode) in which it is determined by the transition determination means (41) whether to shift to the special game state based on a first probability, and the transition determination means (41). And a second determination state (high probability mode) in which it is determined whether or not to shift to the special gaming state based on a second probability that is higher than the first probability.
The special game includes a first special game (ordinary jackpot game) that is shifted to the first determination state by the state shift means (41) after the special game is ended, and the state shift means (after the special game is ended). 41) and a second special game (probability big hit game) transferred to the second determination state by
The gaming machine according to appendix A5, wherein the privilege grant period is set to a period during which the first special game is executed.

  Here, the special game Renso (Ohatsu Renso) is started with the second special game (probability jackpot) as a trigger and ends with the first special game (normal jackpot game) as a trigger. As described above, the first special game (ordinary jackpot game) triggers the end of the special game renso (big jackpot villa), and the result of the transition determination in the first determination state (low probability mode) is the first special game. If the game (ordinary jackpot game) is to be shifted to a special game state in which the game is executed, the special game renso (bonanza renso) is not started. Therefore, if the result of the transition determination is that the transition to the special game state in which the first special game (ordinary jackpot game) is executed, the player can play the game for the first special game (ordinary jackpot game). There is a concern that interest will decline.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to appendix A6, when the privilege grant period is set to the first special game (normal jackpot game), the player can obtain a privilege in the first special game (normal jackpot game). . This makes it possible to advance the first special game (usually a big hit game) while expecting the content of the privilege. In the first special game (ordinary jackpot game) at the special game renso (large jackpot villa), the greater the number of special games continued so far, the greater the expectation for the content of the privilege to be acquired. Thereby, the fall of the interest of the game with respect to a 1st special game (normal jackpot game) can be suppressed.

[Appendix A7]
Any one of Supplementary Note A2 to Supplementary Note A6, further comprising determination result presenting means (341) for presenting a determination result as to whether or not an event corresponding to the selection item has occurred in the predetermined period to the player. The gaming machine described in 1.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A7, a determination result as to whether or not an event corresponding to the selected item has occurred in a predetermined period is presented to the determination result presentation means. In this way, the determination result as to whether or not an event corresponding to the selection item has occurred is presented, so that the player can easily grasp whether or not his / her prediction is correct.

[Appendix A8]
The gaming machine according to appendix A7, wherein a determination result presentation period in which the determination result is presented by the determination result presentation means (51) is set to a period in which the special game is executed.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A8, a determination result presentation period in which a determination result as to whether or not a selection item has occurred is set as a period during which the special game is executed. Thus, by setting the determination result presentation period in the period in which the special game is executed, the determination result for the selection item can be presented using the period in which the special game is executed. Thereby, since the determination result with respect to a selection item can be shown using a special game, it can prevent that the alerting | reporting of the result with respect to a transition determination is inhibited by presentation of the determination result with respect to a selection item.

[Appendix A9]
When an event corresponding to a selection item selected by the player from the plurality of items presented by the item presenting means (341) occurs during the game, a virtual value (virtual coin) is given to the player Virtual value giving means (51)
The gaming machine according to appendix A1, wherein the privilege granting means (51) grants a privilege to a player based on the virtual value given by the virtual value granting means (51).

  In the gaming machine according to appendix A9, when an event selected by the player from a plurality of items occurs during the game, a virtual value is given to the player, and a privilege is given to the player based on the virtual value. The As described above, if a virtual value is given as a reward when the player's prediction is correct, a privilege can be given to the player in various forms using the virtual value. For example, it is possible to prepare a plurality of privileges corresponding to the virtual value and to obtain a privilege that the player desires among those privileges according to the virtual value owned by the player.

[Appendix A10]
The gaming machine according to appendix A9, wherein the virtual value giving means (51) gives the player the virtual value corresponding to the probability of occurrence of an event corresponding to the selection item during the game. .

  In the gaming machine according to attachment A10, when an event corresponding to the selection item by the player occurs, a virtual value corresponding to the occurrence probability of the event is given. By assigning virtual value according to the occurrence frequency of events in this way, the expected value of virtual value for each of a plurality of items that can be selected by the player is made uniform. As a result, the advantages and disadvantages of each of the plurality of items can be eliminated.

[Appendix A11]
Privilege presenting means (341) for presenting the plurality of privileges;
A selected privilege storage means (51) for storing a selected privilege selected by the player among the plurality of privileges;
Further comprising
The privilege granting means (51) gives the player the selected benefit stored in the selected privilege storage means when an event corresponding to the selection item occurs during the game. The gaming machine according to appendix A1.

  In the gaming machine according to attachment A11, the player can select a privilege when an event corresponding to the selection item by the player occurs. Since the player can select a privilege as described above, it is possible to obtain a privilege that the player desires. Therefore, the interest in the event prediction is improved as compared with the case where the privilege is selected by the game.

[Appendix A12]
The gaming machine according to appendix A11, further comprising information display means (39, 241) capable of displaying the privilege acquired by the player.

  In the gaming machine according to appendix A12, the privilege obtained by the player is displayed on the information display means. In this way, if the obtained privilege is displayed on the information display means, the player can easily grasp the obtained privilege, so that convenience is improved.

[Appendix A13]
A transition determination means (41) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state in which a special game advantageous to the player (a jackpot game) is executed based on establishment of the determination condition;
The gaming machine according to appendix A12, wherein the information display means (341) notifies the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41).

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A13, the privilege obtained by the player is displayed in the information display means for displaying the result of the determination of transition to the special gaming state. Thus, if the privilege is displayed on the information display means for displaying the determination result of transition to the special gaming state, it is not necessary to provide information display means again to display the privilege obtained by the player, Since existing information display means can be used, there is a great advantage in manufacturing a gaming machine.

[Appendix A14]
A transition determination means (41) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state in which a special game advantageous to the player (a jackpot game) is executed based on establishment of the determination condition;
The information display means (39, 241) includes a first information display means (341) for notifying the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41), and the transition determination by the transition determination means (41). Second information display means (39) not involved in reporting the result,
Of the first information display means (341) and the second information display means (39), at least the second information display means (39) can display the privilege acquired by the player. A gaming machine according to appendix A12.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A14, the privilege obtained by the player is displayed on the second information display means not related to the notification of the determination result of the transition to the special gaming state. Thus, if the privilege obtained by the player is displayed on the second information display means, the privilege obtained by the player in various formats can be displayed without being restricted by the first information display means. it can. In addition to the second information display means, if the benefit obtained by the player is also displayed on the first information display means in which the transition determination result is notified, it becomes easier for the player to grasp the benefit. In addition, the player can confirm the privilege obtained by selecting an information display means that allows the player to easily recognize the privilege.

[Appendix A15]
The item presenting means (341) presents the plurality of items to a player in a first presenting period,
A selection item storage unit (512) for storing a selection item selected by the player from the plurality of items presented in the first presentation period by the item presentation unit (51);
The privilege granting means (51) grants a privilege to the player when an event corresponding to the selection item stored in the selection item storage means (512) occurs during the game,
Operation means operated by a player to cause the item presenting means (341) to present the selection items stored in the selection item storage means (512) in a second presentation period different from the first presentation period. (21) and
And a selection item presentation control unit (51) for causing the item presentation unit (341) to present the selection item when the operation unit (21) is operated by the player in the second presentation period. The gaming machine according to appendix A1, characterized by:

  In the gaming machine according to attachment A15, the selection item selected by the player in the first presentation period can be presented by operating the operation means in the second presentation period different from the first presentation period. Thereby, the player can present the selection item by operating the operation means in the second presentation period. Therefore, the player can confirm the selection item in the second presentation period when he / she wants to confirm the selection item, for example, when he / she forgets the selection item or when the player is changed. As a result, the player can surely grasp the selection item by confirming the selection item, and can enjoy whether or not an event corresponding to the selection item occurs in the progress of the game.

[Appendix A16]
A transition determination means (41) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state in which a special game advantageous to the player (a jackpot game) is executed based on establishment of the determination condition;
A notification game execution means (41) for executing a notification game (variable game) for notifying the result of the shift determination by the shift determination means (41);
Further comprising
The gaming machine according to appendix A15, wherein the second presentation period is set to a period in which neither the special game nor the notification game is executed.

  In the gaming machine according to attachment A16, the second presentation period in which the selection item can be confirmed is set to a period in which neither the special game nor the notification game is executed. Thus, the player can check the selection items at his / her own pace with careful and careful time without being restricted by time.

[Appendix A17]
The selection item presentation control means (51) allows the player to select the plurality of items in the item presentation means (341) when the operation means (21) is operated by the player in the second presentation period. To present
When the item presenting means (341) presents the plurality of items in the second presentation period, if there is an item selection by the player from the plurality of items, the item is stored in the selection item storage means (512). The gaming machine according to appendix A15 or appendix A16, further comprising selection target event updating means (51) for updating the selection item to be an item selected by the player in the second presentation period.

  In the gaming machine according to attachment A17, similarly to the first presentation period, a plurality of items are presented to be selectable by the player in the second presentation period, and selection items are selected as items selected by the player in the second presentation period. Is updated. That is, the selection item in the first presentation period can be changed in the second presentation period. Thereby, when the player wishes to change the selection item, for example, when the player wishes to change the item because he / she did not select the item according to his / her intention during the first presentation period, or when the player has changed. In the case where the player after the change wants to change, the selection item can be changed to the item desired by the player. Thereby, it can respond flexibly with respect to selection of the item by a player.

[Appendix A18]
The selection item presentation control means (51) causes the selection item to be presented so as to be distinguishable from a non-selection item different from the selection item among the plurality of items. .

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A18, when a plurality of items are presented in the second presentation period, the selected item is presented so as to be distinguishable from other items (non-selected items). Therefore, the player can consider whether to change the selection item in a state where the selection item is grasped. Further, when it is determined that the selection item does not need to be changed, it is not necessary to perform an operation necessary for selecting an item from a plurality of items, which improves convenience.

[Appendix A19]
The item presenting means (341) presents the plurality of items to a player in a first presenting period,
In the bonus granting means (51), an event corresponding to a selection item selected by the player from the plurality of items presented in the first presentation period by the item presenting means (341) is in progress of the game. When it occurs, it grants the player a privilege selected by the player from among a plurality of privileges,
Privilege presenting means (341) for presenting the plurality of privileges to the player in the first presentation period;
A selection privilege storage means (512) for storing the selection privilege;
Operation means operated by a player to cause the privilege presenting means (341) to present the selected benefit stored in the selected benefit storage means (512) in a second presentation period different from the first presentation period. (21) and
A selection privilege presentation control means (51) for causing the privilege presentation means (341) to present the selection privilege when the operation means (21) is operated by a player in the second presentation period;
Further comprising
The privilege granting means (51) gives the player the selected privilege stored in the selected privilege storage means (512) when an event corresponding to the selection item occurs during the game. The gaming machine according to appendix A1, characterized by:

  In the gaming machine according to attachment A19, the selection privilege selected by the player in the first presentation period can be presented by an operation on the operation means in a second presentation period different from the first presentation period. Thereby, the player can present the selected privilege by operating the operation means in the second presentation period. Therefore, the player can confirm the selected privilege in the second presentation period when he / she wants to confirm the selected privilege, for example, when he / she has forgotten the selected privilege or when the player has changed. As a result, the player can surely grasp the selected privilege by confirming the selected privilege, and therefore can enjoy whether or not an event corresponding to the selected privilege occurs in the progress of the game. You can enjoy whether it occurs as expected.

[Appendix A20]
A transition determination means (41) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state in which a special game advantageous to the player (a jackpot game) is executed based on establishment of the determination condition;
A notification game execution means (41) for executing a notification game (variable game) for notifying the result of the shift determination by the shift determination means (41);
Further comprising
The gaming machine according to appendix A19, wherein the second presentation period is set to a period in which neither the special game nor the notification game is executed.

  In the gaming machine according to Appendix A20, the second presentation period during which the selected privilege can be confirmed is set to a period in which neither the special game nor the notification game is executed. Thus, the player can check the selection items at his / her own pace with careful and careful time without being restricted by time.

[Appendix A21]
The selected privilege presentation control means (51) selects the plurality of privileges by the player in the privilege presenting means (341) when the operation means (21) is operated by the player in the second presentation period. To present
When the plurality of benefits are presented by the privilege presenting means (341) in the second presentation period, if there is a privilege selection by the player from the plurality of benefits, the selection is stored in the selected privilege storage means (512). The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A19 or Supplementary Note A20, further comprising: a selective privilege update means (51) that updates the selected privilege to be a privilege selected by the player in the second presentation period.

  In the gaming machine according to attachment A21, similarly to the first presentation period, a plurality of benefits are presented to be selectable by the player in the second presentation period, and the benefits selected for the privilege selected by the player in the second presentation period Is updated. That is, the selected privilege in the first presentation period can be changed in the second presentation period. Thereby, when the player wishes to change the selected privilege, for example, when the player wishes to change because the privilege cannot be selected according to his intention during the first presentation period, or when the player has changed. In the case where the player after the change wants to change, the selected privilege can be changed to the privilege desired by the player. Thereby, it can respond flexibly with respect to selection of the item by a player.

[Appendix A22]
The selected privilege presentation control means (51) causes the selected privilege to be presented so as to be distinguishable from a non-selected privilege different from the selected privilege among the plurality of privileges. .

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A22, when a plurality of benefits are presented in the second presentation period, the selected privilege is presented so as to be distinguishable from other privileges (non-selected benefits). Therefore, the player can consider whether or not to change the selected privilege in a state where the selected privilege is grasped. In addition, when it is determined that it is not necessary to change the selected privilege, it is not necessary to perform an operation necessary for selecting a privilege from a plurality of privileges, so that convenience is improved.

[Appendix A23]
A transition determination means (41) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state in which a special game advantageous to the player (a jackpot game) is executed based on establishment of the determination condition;
The special game is a game that is expected to acquire a large amount of game balls,
The privilege is information for specifying or inferring performance information (game setting value, number of lottery per unit jackpot, base, continuous character ratio, character ratio, etc.) that is an index indicating the performance of the ball. A gaming machine according to appendix A1.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A23, the benefit when an event corresponding to the selection item by the player occurs is information for specifying or inferring performance information that serves as an index indicating the appearance performance. Since such information can be obtained as a privilege by the player, it is possible to specify or infer the appearance performance of the gaming machine. Thereby, the player enjoys the guessing of the ball performance, enjoys the game while expecting the ball performance to be specified, and whether or not to continue the game based on the guess or recognition result of the ball performance It becomes possible to judge.

[Appendix A24]
Advantage determination probability setting means (41) capable of setting an advantage determination probability determined to shift to the special gaming state in the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) from a plurality of mutually different advantage determination probabilities. In addition,
The gaming machine according to appendix A23, wherein the performance information includes information (game setting value) related to the advantage determination probability set by the advantage determination probability setting means (41).

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A24, a privilege when an event corresponding to a selection item by the player occurs is information on the advantage determination probability. Since the advantage determination probability has a large effect on the game performance of the gaming machine, information on the advantage determination probability is available as a benefit, based on an index that more appropriately reflects the game performance of the gaming machine. It is possible to specify or guess the ball performance. Thereby, the player enjoys the guess of the advantage determination probability, enjoys the game while expecting the advantage determination probability to be specified, and whether or not to continue the game based on the advantage determination probability or the recognition result. It becomes possible to judge.

[Appendix A25]
It further comprises image rendering means (341) for performing image rendering in the progress of the game,
The gaming machine according to appendix A1, wherein the privilege is an item that enables customization of a character that appears in the image effect executed by the image effect means (341).

[Appendix A26]
Music output means (26) for outputting music in the course of the game;
Further comprising
The gaming machine according to appendix A1, wherein the bonus is addition of music that can be output from the music output means (26).

  In the gaming machines according to Supplementary Note A25 and Supplementary Note A26, a privilege when an event corresponding to a selection item by a player occurs is an item for character customization or addition of music. In this way, when the privilege is an item for customization or addition of music, it becomes possible to improve interest in event prediction in order to acquire items or music, and as a result, it is possible to improve interest in games. . In addition, when the privilege is an item or a song addition, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by stimulating the player's desire to collect. Moreover, it becomes possible to stimulate the player's desire to collect by including rare items and rare music in items and music as a privilege.

[Appendix A27]
The game machine according to appendix A1 to appendix A26, wherein the event corresponding to the plurality of items is an event that can be recognized by a player in the progress of the game.

  In the gaming machine according to attachment A27, events corresponding to a plurality of items are set as events that can be recognized by the player. Thereby, the player can grasp whether or not an expected event corresponding to the selected item has occurred in a predetermined period, and thus can enjoy the game by paying attention to whether or not an expected event occurs in the progress of the game.

[Appendix B1]
Item presenting means (341) for presenting the player with the plurality of items for causing the player to select at least one item from among a plurality of items relating to events that may occur during the progress of the game;
A virtual value (virtual coin) is given to a player when an event corresponding to a selection item selected by the player from the plurality of items presented by the item presenting means (341) occurs during the game. Virtual value giving means (51) to perform,
Privilege granting means (51) for granting a privilege to a player based on the virtual value given by the virtual value giving means (51);
A gaming machine comprising:

  In the gaming machine according to Appendix B1, a virtual value is given to the player when an event selected by the player from a plurality of items occurs during the game, and a privilege is given to the player based on this virtual value. The As described above, if a virtual value is given as a reward when the player's prediction is correct, a privilege can be given to the player in various forms using the virtual value. For example, it is possible to prepare a plurality of privileges corresponding to the virtual value and to obtain a privilege that the player desires among those privileges according to the virtual value owned by the player.

[Appendix B2]
The gaming machine according to appendix B1, wherein the virtual value giving means (51) gives the player the virtual value according to the probability of occurrence of an event corresponding to the selection item during the game. .

  In the gaming machine according to Appendix B2, when an event corresponding to a selection item by the player occurs, a virtual value corresponding to the occurrence probability of the event is given. By assigning virtual value according to the occurrence frequency of events in this way, the expected value of virtual value for each of a plurality of items that can be selected by the player is made uniform. As a result, the advantages and disadvantages of each of the plurality of items can be eliminated.

[Appendix B3]
A transition determination means (41) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state in which a special game advantageous to the player (a jackpot game) is executed based on establishment of the determination condition;
The special game is a game that is expected to acquire a large amount of game balls,
The privilege is information for specifying or inferring performance information (game setting value, number of lottery per unit jackpot, base, continuous character ratio, character ratio, etc.) that is an index indicating the performance of the ball. The gaming machine according to Appendix B1 or Appendix B2.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note B3, the privilege when an event corresponding to the selection item by the player occurs is information for specifying or estimating the ball-out performance. Since such information can be obtained as a privilege by the player, it is possible to specify or infer the appearance performance of the gaming machine. Thereby, the player enjoys the guessing of the ball performance, enjoys the game while expecting the ball performance to be specified, and whether or not to continue the game based on the specification or guess of the ball performance It becomes possible to judge.

[Appendix B4]
Advantage determination probability setting means (41) capable of setting an advantage determination probability determined to shift to the special gaming state in the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) from a plurality of mutually different advantage determination probabilities. In addition,
The gaming machine according to appendix B3, wherein the performance information includes information related to the advantage determination probability (game setting value) set by the advantage determination probability setting means (41).

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note B4, a privilege when an event corresponding to a selection item by the player occurs is information on the advantage determination probability. Since the advantage determination probability has a large effect on the game performance of the gaming machine, information on the advantage determination probability is available as a benefit, based on an index that more appropriately reflects the game performance of the gaming machine. It is possible to specify or guess the ball performance. Thereby, the player enjoys the guess of the advantage determination probability, enjoys the game while expecting the advantage determination probability to be specified, and whether or not to continue the game based on the advantage determination probability or the recognition result. It becomes possible to judge.

[Appendix B5]
It further comprises image rendering means (341) for performing image rendering in the progress of the game,
The gaming machine according to any one of appendix B1 to appendix B4, wherein the privilege is an item that enables customization of a character that appears in the image rendering executed by the image rendering means (341).

[Appendix B6]
Music output means (26) for outputting music in the course of the game;
Further comprising
The gaming machine according to any one of appendix B1 to appendix B5, wherein the privilege is addition of a song that can be output from the song output means (26).

  In the gaming machines according to Supplementary Note B5 and Supplementary Note B6, a privilege when an event corresponding to a selection item by the player occurs is an item for character customization or addition of music. In this way, when the privilege is an item for customization or addition of music, it becomes possible to improve interest in event prediction in order to acquire items or music, and as a result, it is possible to improve interest in games. . In addition, when the privilege is an item or a song addition, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by stimulating the player's desire to collect. Moreover, it becomes possible to stimulate the player's desire to collect by including rare items and rare music in items and music as a privilege.

[Appendix C1]
Item presenting means (341) for presenting the player with the plurality of items for causing the player to select at least one item from among a plurality of items relating to events that may occur during the progress of the game;
When an event corresponding to a selection item selected by the player from the plurality of items presented by the item presenting means (341) occurs during the progress of the game, it is selected by the player from the plurality of benefits. Privilege granting means (51) for granting the selected privilege to the player;
Privilege presenting means (341) for presenting the plurality of privileges;
A selected privilege storage means (51) for storing a selected privilege selected by the player among the plurality of privileges;
With
The privilege granting means (51) gives the player the selected benefit stored in the selected privilege storage means when an event corresponding to the selection item occurs during the game. Gaming machine.

  In the gaming machine according to Appendix C1, the player can select a privilege when an event corresponding to a selection item by the player occurs. Thus, since the privilege which a player desires can be acquired because the selection of the privilege by a player is possible, the interest with respect to event prediction is improved.

[Appendix C2]
The gaming machine according to supplementary note C1, further comprising information display means (39, 241) capable of displaying the privilege acquired by the player.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note C2, the privilege obtained by the player is displayed on the information display means. Thus, if the privilege obtained on the information display means is displayed, the player can easily grasp the obtained privilege, so that convenience is improved.

[Appendix C3]
A transition determination means (41) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state in which a special game advantageous to the player (a jackpot game) is executed based on establishment of the determination condition;
The gaming machine according to appendix C2, wherein the information display means (341) is configured to notify the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41).

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note C3, the privilege obtained by the player is displayed in the information display means for displaying the result of the determination of transition to the special gaming state. In this way, if the privilege is displayed on the information display means for displaying the determination result of the transition to the special gaming state, there is no need to provide an information display means for displaying the privilege obtained by the player. Since the information display means can be used, there is a great advantage in manufacturing a gaming machine.

[Appendix C4]
A transition determination means (41) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state in which a special game advantageous to the player (a jackpot game) is executed based on establishment of the determination condition;
The information display means (39, 241) includes a first information display means (341) for notifying the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41), and the transition determination by the transition determination means (41). Second information display means (39) not involved in reporting the result,
Of the first information display means (341) and the second information display means (39), at least the second information display means (39) can display the privilege acquired by the player. A gaming machine according to appendix C2.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note C4, the privilege obtained by the player is displayed on the second information display means not related to the notification of the determination result of the transition to the special gaming state. Thus, if the privilege obtained by the player is displayed on the second information display means, the privilege obtained by the player in various formats can be displayed without being restricted by the first information display means. it can. In addition to the second information display means, if the benefit obtained by the player is also displayed on the first information display means in which the transition determination result is notified, it becomes easier for the player to grasp the benefit. Further, the player can confirm the privilege obtained by the information display means that makes it easy for the player to grasp the privilege.

[Appendix C5]
Virtual value giving means (51) for giving a virtual value to a player when an event corresponding to the selection item occurs during the game;
A selection privilege presenting means (341) for presenting a player with a plurality of privileges that can be selected based on the virtual value;
Further comprising
The privilege granting means (51) grants the player a privilege selected by the player based on the virtual value given by the virtual value granting means (51). A gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  In the gaming machine according to Appendix C5, when an event corresponding to the selection item occurs during the game, a virtual value is given to the player, and a privilege selected by the player based on the virtual value is given to the player. The Thereby, the player can obtain the virtual value as a reward when the prediction is correct, and can obtain the privilege selected by the player according to the obtained virtual value.

[Appendix C6]
A transition determination means (41) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state in which a special game advantageous to the player (a jackpot game) is executed based on establishment of the determination condition;
The special game is a game that is expected to acquire a large amount of game balls,
The plurality of benefits are information for specifying or inferring performance information (game setting value, number of lottery per unit jackpot, base, continuous feature ratio, feature ratio, etc.) serving as an index indicating the performance of the ball. The gaming machine according to Appendix C5, which is characterized.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note C6, the privilege that can be selected based on the virtual value is performance information (game setting value, number of lottery per unit jackpot, base, consecutive feature ratio, feature ratio, etc.) that is an index indicating the performance of the ball. ) Is information for specifying or estimating. Since such information can be obtained as a privilege by the player, it is possible to specify or infer the appearance performance of the gaming machine. In addition, as a result, the player enjoys guessing the ball performance, enjoys the game while expecting the ball performance to be specified, and whether or not to continue the game based on the specification or guess of the ball performance. It becomes possible to judge. In addition, the player can determine information for specifying or estimating the ball performance by his / her own intention. Therefore, the player can obtain information necessary for determining whether or not to continue the game in the gaming machine being played based on his / her judgment criteria. As a result, it is possible to give the player the motivation to determine whether or not to continue the game in the gaming machine being played based on his / her own judgment criteria based on the performance.

[Appendix C7]
Advantage determination probability setting means (41) capable of setting an advantage determination probability determined to shift to the special gaming state in the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) from a plurality of mutually different advantage determination probabilities. In addition,
The gaming machine according to appendix C6, wherein the performance information includes information (game setting value) related to the advantage determination probability set by the advantage determination probability setting means (41).

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note C7, the privilege that can be selected based on the virtual value is information related to the advantage determination probability. Since the advantage determination probability has a large effect on the game performance of the gaming machine, information on the advantage determination probability is available as a benefit, based on an index that more appropriately reflects the game performance of the gaming machine. It is possible to specify or guess the ball performance. Thereby, the player enjoys the guess of the advantage determination probability, enjoys the game while expecting the advantage determination probability to be specified, and whether or not to continue the game based on the advantage determination probability or the recognition result. It becomes possible to judge.

[Appendix C8]
In the plurality of benefits, the virtual value necessary to enable selection by the player by the selection privilege presenting means (341) for each privilege is set to the supplementary notes C5 to C7. A gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  In the gaming machine according to appendix C8, a virtual value necessary to enable selection by a player is set for each of a plurality of benefits that can be selected based on the virtual value. Accordingly, the player can select a desired benefit from a plurality of benefits in consideration of the virtual value necessary for selecting each benefit, the importance of the player for each benefit, and the like. Therefore, since a strategic element is added to selecting a privilege from a plurality of privileges, the interest in the game is improved.

[Appendix D1]
Item presenting means (341) for presenting the player with the plurality of items for causing the player to select at least one item from among a plurality of items regarding events that may occur during the progress of the game;
A selection item storage unit (512) for storing a selection item selected by the player from the plurality of items presented in the first presentation period by the item presentation unit (51);
A privilege granting means (51) for granting a privilege to a player when an event corresponding to the selection item stored in the selection item storage means (512) occurs during the progress of the game;
Operation means operated by a player to cause the item presenting means (341) to present the selection items stored in the selection item storage means (512) in a second presentation period different from the first presentation period. (21) and
A selection item presentation control means (51) for causing the item presentation means (341) to present the selection item when the operation means (21) is operated by a player in the second presentation period;
A gaming machine comprising:

  In the gaming machine according to attachment D1, the selection item selected by the player in the first presentation period can be presented by an operation on the operation means in the second presentation period different from the first presentation period. Thereby, the player can present the selection item by operating the operation means in the second presentation period. Therefore, the player can confirm the selection item in the second presentation period when he / she wants to confirm the selection item, for example, when he / she forgets the selection item or when the player is changed. As a result, the player can surely grasp the selection item by confirming the selection item, and can enjoy whether or not an event corresponding to the selection item occurs in the progress of the game.

[Appendix D2]
A transition determination means (41) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state in which a special game advantageous to the player (a jackpot game) is executed based on establishment of the determination condition;
A notification game execution means (41) for executing a notification game (variable game) for notifying the result of the shift determination by the shift determination means (41);
Further comprising
The gaming machine according to Appendix D1, wherein the second presentation period is set to a period in which neither the special game nor the notification game is executed.

  In the gaming machine according to attachment D2, the second presentation period in which the selection item can be confirmed is set to a period in which neither the special game nor the notification game is executed. Thus, the player can check the selection items at his / her own pace with careful and careful time without being restricted by time.

[Appendix D3]
The selection item presentation control means (51) allows the player to select the plurality of items in the item presentation means (341) when the operation means (21) is operated by the player in the second presentation period. To present
When the item is presented by the item presenting means (341) in the second presentation period, if an item is selected by the player from the plurality of items, the item is stored in the selection item storage means (512). The gaming machine according to appendix D1 or appendix D2, further comprising selection target event updating means (51) for updating the selection item to be an item selected by the player in the second presentation period.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note D3, similarly to the first presentation period, a plurality of items are presented so that selection by the player is possible in the second presentation period, and selection items are selected as items selected by the player in the second presentation period. Is updated. That is, the selection item in the first presentation period can be changed in the second presentation period. Therefore, if the player wishes to change the selection item, for example, if the player wishes to change the item because he / she has not been able to select the item as he wishes during the first presentation period, or if the player has changed In a case where a subsequent player wants to change, the selection item can be changed to an item desired by the player. Thereby, it can respond flexibly with respect to selection of the item by a player.

[Appendix D4]
The selection item presentation control means (51) causes the selection item to be presented so as to be distinguishable from a non-selection item different from the selection item among the plurality of items. .

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note D4, when a plurality of items are presented in the second presentation period, the selected item is presented so as to be distinguishable from other items (non-selected items). Therefore, the player can consider whether to change the selection item in a state where the selection item is grasped. Further, when it is determined that the selection item does not need to be changed, it is not necessary to perform an operation necessary for selecting an item from a plurality of items, which improves convenience.

[Appendix D5]
A transition determination means (41) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state in which a special game advantageous to the player (a jackpot game) is executed based on establishment of the determination condition;
The special game is a game that is expected to acquire a large amount of game balls,
The privilege is information for specifying or inferring performance information (game setting value, number of lottery per unit jackpot, base, continuous character ratio, character ratio, etc.) that is an index indicating the performance of the ball. The gaming machine according to any one of appendix D1 to appendix D4.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note D5, the benefit when an event corresponding to the selection item by the player occurs is information for specifying or estimating performance information that serves as an index indicating the performance of the ball. Since such information can be obtained as a privilege by the player, it is possible to specify or infer the appearance performance of the gaming machine. Thereby, the player enjoys the guessing of the ball performance, enjoys the game while expecting the ball performance to be specified, and whether or not to continue the game based on the guess or recognition result of the ball performance It becomes possible to judge.

[Appendix D6]
Advantage determination probability setting means (41) capable of setting an advantage determination probability determined to shift to the special gaming state in the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) from a plurality of mutually different advantage determination probabilities. In addition,
The gaming machine according to appendix D5, wherein the performance information includes information (game setting value) relating to the advantage determination probability set by the advantage determination probability setting means (41).

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note D6, a privilege when an event corresponding to a selection item by the player occurs is information on the advantage determination probability. Since the advantage determination probability has a large effect on the game performance of the gaming machine, information on the advantage determination probability is available as a benefit, based on an index that more appropriately reflects the game performance of the gaming machine. Specify or guess the ball performance. Thereby, the player enjoys guessing of the advantage determination probability, enjoys the game while expecting the advantage determination probability to be specified, and determines whether or not to continue the game based on the specification or guess of the advantage determination probability. It becomes possible to judge.

[Appendix D7]
It further comprises image rendering means (341) for performing image rendering in the progress of the game,
The gaming machine according to any one of appendix D1 to appendix D6, wherein the privilege is an item that enables customization of a character that appears in the image rendering executed by the image rendering means (341).

[Appendix D8]
Music output means (26) for outputting music in the course of the game;
Further comprising
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes D1 to D7, wherein the privilege is addition of a musical piece that can be output from the musical piece output means (26).

  In the gaming machines according to Supplementary Note D7 and Supplementary Note D8, a privilege when an event corresponding to a selection item by the player occurs is an item for character customization or addition of music. In this way, when the privilege is an item for customization or addition of music, it becomes possible to improve interest in event prediction in order to acquire items or music, and as a result, it is possible to improve interest in games. . In addition, when the privilege is an item or a song addition, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by stimulating the player's desire to collect. Moreover, it becomes possible to stimulate the player's desire to collect by including rare items and rare music in items and music as a privilege.

[Appendix E1]
Item presenting means (341) for presenting the player with the plurality of items for causing the player to select at least one item from among a plurality of items regarding events that may occur during the progress of the game;
When an event corresponding to a selection item selected by the player from the plurality of items presented in the first presentation period by the item presenting means (341) occurs during the progress of the game, A privilege granting means (51) for granting a privilege selected by the player to the player;
Privilege presenting means (341) for presenting the plurality of privileges to the player in the first presentation period;
A selection privilege storage means (512) for storing the selection privilege;
Operation means operated by a player to cause the privilege presenting means (341) to present the selected benefit stored in the selected benefit storage means (512) in a second presentation period different from the first presentation period. (21) and
A selection privilege presentation control means (51) for causing the privilege presentation means (341) to present the selection privilege when the operation means (21) is operated by a player in the second presentation period;
With
The privilege granting means (51) gives the player the selected privilege stored in the selected privilege storage means (512) when an event corresponding to the selection item occurs during the game. A gaming machine characterized by

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note E1, the selected privilege selected by the player in the first presentation period can be presented by an operation on the operation means in a second presentation period different from the first presentation period. Thereby, the player can present the selected privilege by operating the operation means in the second presentation period. Therefore, the player can confirm the selected privilege in the second presentation period when he / she wants to confirm the selected privilege, for example, when he / she has forgotten the selected privilege or when the player has changed. As a result, the player can surely grasp the selected privilege by confirming the selected privilege, and therefore can enjoy whether or not an event corresponding to the selected privilege occurs in the progress of the game. You can enjoy whether it occurs as expected.

[Appendix E2]
A transition determination means (41) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state in which a special game advantageous to the player (a jackpot game) is executed based on establishment of the determination condition;
A notification game execution means (41) for executing a notification game (variable game) for notifying the result of the shift determination by the shift determination means (41);
Further comprising
The gaming machine according to appendix E1, wherein the second presentation period is set to a period in which neither the special game nor the notification game is executed.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note E2, the second presentation period during which the selected privilege can be confirmed is set to a period in which neither the special game nor the notification game is executed. Thus, the player can check the selection items at his / her own pace with careful and careful time without being restricted by time.

[Appendix E3]
The selected privilege presentation control means (51) selects the plurality of privileges by the player in the privilege presenting means (341) when the operation means (21) is operated by the player in the second presentation period. To present
When the plurality of benefits are presented by the privilege presenting means (341) in the second presentation period, if there is a privilege selection by the player from the plurality of benefits, the selection is stored in the selected privilege storage means (512). The game according to any one of Supplementary Note E1 or Supplementary Note E2, further comprising: a selective privilege update means (51) that updates the selected privilege to be a privilege selected by the player in the second presentation period. Machine.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note E3, similarly to the first presentation period, a plurality of benefits are presented in a manner that can be selected by the player in the second presentation period, and the benefits selected for the privilege selected by the player in the second presentation period Is updated. That is, the selected privilege in the first presentation period can be changed in the second presentation period. Therefore, when the player wishes to change the selected privilege, for example, when the player wishes to change because the privilege cannot be selected according to his / her intention during the first presentation period, or when the player changes In a case where a subsequent player wants to change, the selected privilege can be changed to the privilege desired by the player. Thereby, it can respond flexibly with respect to selection of the item by a player.

[Appendix E4]
The gaming machine according to appendix E3, wherein the selected privilege presentation control means (51) presents the selected privilege so as to be distinguishable from a non-selected privilege different from the selected privilege among the plurality of privileges. .

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note E4, when a plurality of privileges are presented in the second presentation period, the selected privilege is presented so as to be distinguishable from other privileges (non-selected benefits). Therefore, the player can consider whether or not to change the selected privilege in a state where the selected privilege is grasped. In addition, when it is determined that it is not necessary to change the selected privilege, it is not necessary to perform an operation necessary for selecting a privilege from a plurality of privileges, so that convenience is improved.

[Appendix E5]
A transition determination means (41) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state in which a special game advantageous to the player (a jackpot game) is executed based on establishment of the determination condition;
The special game is a game that is expected to acquire a large amount of game balls,
The privilege is information for specifying or inferring performance information (game setting value, number of lottery per unit jackpot, base, continuous character ratio, character ratio, etc.) that is an index indicating the performance of the ball. The gaming machine according to any one of appendix E1 to appendix E4.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note E5, the benefit when an event corresponding to the selection item by the player occurs is information for specifying or estimating performance information serving as an index indicating the performance of the ball. Since such information can be obtained as a privilege by the player, it is possible to specify or infer the appearance performance of the gaming machine. Accordingly, the player enjoys guessing the performance of the ball, enjoys the game while expecting the ball performance to be specified, and determines whether or not to continue the game based on the specification or estimation of the ball performance. It becomes possible to judge.

[Appendix E6]
Advantage determination probability setting means (41) capable of setting an advantage determination probability determined to shift to the special gaming state in the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) from a plurality of mutually different advantage determination probabilities. In addition,
The gaming machine according to appendix E5, wherein the performance information includes information (game setting value) relating to the advantage determination probability set by the advantage determination probability setting means (41).

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note E6, a privilege when an event corresponding to a selection item by the player occurs is information on the advantage determination probability. Since the advantage determination probability has a large effect on the game performance of the gaming machine, information on the advantage determination probability is available as a benefit, based on an index that more appropriately reflects the game performance of the gaming machine. It is possible to specify or guess the ball performance. Thereby, the player enjoys the guess of the advantage determination probability, enjoys the game while expecting the advantage determination probability to be specified, and whether or not to continue the game based on the advantage determination probability or the recognition result. It becomes possible to judge.

[Appendix E7]
It further comprises image rendering means (341) for performing image rendering in the progress of the game,
The gaming machine according to any one of appendix E1 to appendix E6, wherein the privilege is an item that enables customization of a character that appears in the image rendering executed by the image rendering means (341).

[Appendix E8]
Music output means (26) for outputting music in the course of the game;
Further comprising
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes E1 to E7, wherein the bonus is addition of a musical piece that can be output from the musical piece output means (26).

  In the gaming machines according to Supplementary Note E7 and Supplementary Note E8, a privilege when an event corresponding to a selection item by the player occurs is an item for character customization or addition of music. In this way, when the privilege is an item for customization or addition of music, it becomes possible to improve interest in event prediction in order to acquire items or music, and as a result, it is possible to improve interest in games. . In addition, when the privilege is an item or a song addition, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by stimulating the player's desire to collect. Moreover, it becomes possible to stimulate the player's desire to collect by including rare items and rare music in items and music as a privilege.

10: gaming machine 21: selection determination unit 21A: selection button 211: upper selection button 212: lower selection button 213: left selection button 214: right selection buttons 211a to 211d: selection operation switch 21B: determination button 21Ba: determination operation switch 341 : Symbol display unit 39: 7 segment display unit 4: Main controller 41: MPU
411: ROM
412: RAM
47: ROM
5: Audio lamp control device 51: MPU
6: Display control device

Claims (1)

Item presenting means for presenting the player with the plurality of items for causing the player to select at least one item from a plurality of items relating to events that may occur during the progress of the game;
A selection that is selected by a player among a plurality of benefits when an event corresponding to a selection item selected by the player from the plurality of items presented by the item presenting means occurs during the progress of the game A privilege granting means for granting a privilege to a player;
Privilege presenting means for presenting the plurality of privileges;
A selected privilege storage means for storing a selected privilege selected by the player among the plurality of privileges;
With
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the bonus granting unit grants the selected bonus stored in the selected bonus storage unit to a player when an event corresponding to the selection item occurs during the game.

Images